bmw-3-series-m3-2012-owner-manual

Bmw 3 Series M3 2012 Owner's Manual

Bmw 3 Series M3 2012 Owner's Manual – PDF Download

bmw-3-series-m3-2012-owner-manual

PDF ONLINE - Bmw 3 Series M3 2012 Owner’s Manual - DIY & Guides

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 314 Pages, 9.09MB

bmw-3-series-m3-2012-owner-manual

Contents A - Z

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
The Ultimate Driving Machine

ProCarManuals.com

THE BMW 3 SERIES.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

328i 328i xDrive
335i 335i xDrive
335is M3

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Please also read the other booklets of vehicle literature, e.g. the Supplementary Owner's Handbook for the BMW M3.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VIII/11, 09 11 450 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to consult the index, refer to page 298.
4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Dashboard 18 iDrive 25 Voice activation system
Controls
30 Opening and closing 47 Adjustments 57 Transporting children safely 61 Driving 82 Controls overview 96 Technology for driving comfort and
safety 110 Lamps 116 Climate 122 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
138 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
148 Navigation system 150 Destination entry 159 Destination guidance 167 What to do if ...
Entertainment
170 On/off and tone 173 Radio 176 Satellite radio 181 CD/DVD player and CD changer 188 Music collection 194 External devices

Communications
204 Telephone 217 Office 226 Contacts 228 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
236 Refueling 239 Wheels and tires 259 Engine compartment 264 Maintenance 266 Care 270 Replacing components 276 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
284 Technical data 290 Short commands for the voice activation
system 298 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Notes
Notes

ProCarManuals.com

Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Manuals, when necessary, are issued as appendices to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.< Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.< Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.< < Marks the end of a specific item of information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Notes

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and all series-specific equipment, country-specific equipment, and optional equipment that is offered in the series. For this reason, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates some equipment that may not be available in your vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems. If equipment and models are not described in this Owner's Manual, please consult the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Handbooks.
Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Manuals, when necessary, are issued as appendices to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a work-

shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of accessories not approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Notes

ProCarManuals.com

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and registration requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and registration requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance measures:
> BMW Maintenance system
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your center, or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance Dashboard
Dashboard

not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Dashboard At a glance

Convertible: opening and closing

windows jointly 40

Convertible: opening and closing

rear windows 40

Opening and closing front

windows 40

4 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 55
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor 55

Parking lamps 110

Low beams 110
Automatic headlamp control 110 Adaptive Light Control 112 High-beam Assistant 113

Fog lamps 114

Turn signals 71

High beams, headlamp flasher 112

High-beam Assistant 113

Roadside parking lamps 112

Switching the ignition on/off and

starting/stopping the engine 61

12 Ignition lock 61
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone: accepting and ending a call; dialing the selected phone number; redialing if no phone number is selected
Convertible: microphone on steering column

Volume
Activating/deactivating the voice activation system 25 Convertible: microphone on steering column Changing the radio station Interrupting a traffic bulletin Selecting a music track Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated air mode 118

Steering wheel heating 56

Computer 84
Settings and information about the vehicle 86

9 Instrument cluster 12

Windshield wipers 71

Rain sensor 72

15 Horn, entire surface

16 Adjusting the steering wheel 56

Cruise control 75

Active Cruise Control 75

18 Releasing the hood 260 19 OBD socket 265 20 Opening the trunk lid 35

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance Dashboard
Instrument cluster

ProCarManuals.com

1 Speedometer 2 Indicator lamps for turn signals 3 Indicator and warning lamps 13 4 Displays for Active Cruise Control 75 5 Tachometer 83 6 Engine oil temperature 83 7 Display for
> Clock 82 > Outside temperature 82 > Indicator and warning lamps 92

8 Display for > Position of automatic transmission 64 > Gear indicator of 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 66 > Computer 84 > Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 87 > Odometer and trip odometer 82 > High-beam Assistant 113 > Checking the oil level 260 > Settings and information 86 > There is a Check Control message 92
9 Fuel gauge 83 10 Resetting the trip odometer 82

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Dashboard At a glance

Indicator and warning lamps
The concept

Supplementary text messages

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages

You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 92. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 112

Text messages at the top edge of the Control Display describe the meanings of the indicator and warning lamps.

Fog lamps 114
Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability 98
Parking brake applied 63
Canada: parking brake applied 63
Engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 265 Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 265

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance Dashboard
Around the center console: controls and displays

ProCarManuals.com

1 Control Display 18 2 Hazard warning flashers 3 Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97 > Dynamic Traction Control DTC 98 4 Central locking system 35

5 Automatic climate control
Air distribution to the windshield 117 Air distribution to the upper body area 117
Air distribution to the footwell 117
Automatic air distribution and flow rate 118
Cooling function 119

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Automatic recirculated air control AUC and recirculated air mode 118 Maximum cooling 117
ALL program 119
Air volume 118
Defrosting windows 119
Rear window defroster 119
Seat heating 53

6 CD/DVD drive 181 7 Changing
> Radio station 173 > Track 182

Park Distance Control PDC 96

Coupe: Roller sunblinds 126
Coupe: Hill Descent Control HDC 99

9 Controller 18 Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions
10 Buttons on the controller 18 Selecting menus directly

Convertible:

Opening and closing retractable

hardtop 43

12 Programmable memory keys 23 13 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 170 14 Ejecting a CD/DVD 181

Dashboard At a glance

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance Dashboard
Around the roofliner
Coupe

ProCarManuals.com

1 Microphone for voice activation system and for telephone in hands-free mode

SOS: sending an Emergency

Request 276

Reading lamps 115

Glass sunroof 41

Interior lamps 114

Passenger airbag status lamp 108

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Convertible

Dashboard At a glance

ProCarManuals.com

SOS: sending an Emergency

Request 276

Reading lamps 115

Interior lamps 114

Passenger airbag status lamp 108

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance iDrive
iDrive

The concept
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position.
Make entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherSwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Controls at a glance
Controls

ProCarManuals.com

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons You can use the buttons to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

> Move in four directions, arrows 3 > Turn, arrow 4 > Push, arrow 5

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

iDrive At a glance

Control Display
Notes
> Follow care instructions when cleaning the Control Display.
> Do not store items in the region in front of the Control Display; doing so may damage the Control Display.

Operating principle
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 61, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:

Switching off

Press the button.

2. "Switch off control display"

To hide the message: Press the controller. The main menu is displayed. The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu

Switching on
Press the controller to switch on.

Buttons on the controller

Symbol MENU RADIO CD NAV TEL BACK OPTION

Function Open the main menu Open the Radio menu Open the CD/Multimedia menu Start navigation in map view Open the Telephone menu Show previous panel Open the Options menu

Press the button.
The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be selected.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance iDrive

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

View of an opened menu
When you open a menu, generally the panel last selected in this menu is displayed. To display the first panel of the menu: > Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed. > Press the menu's button twice on the con-
troller.
Open the Options menu

2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that should be selected are depicted in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

ProCarManuals.com

Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
> Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed. Pressing the BACK button reopens the previous panel. This does not close the current panel.
> Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened and laid over it.

Another possibility: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.
Options menu
The "Options" menu is composed of different areas: > Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".
The region remains unchanged. > Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g. "Radio". > Other control options for the selected
menu, for example "Store station".

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

iDrive At a glance

Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

ProCarManuals.com

3. Press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated. The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

Status information
Status box
The status box at the top right displays the following information: > Time > Current entertainment source > Sound output ON/OFF > Mobile phone network with strongest
reception > Telephone status > Traffic reports reception

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance iDrive

Status box symbols
The symbols are divided into separate groups.

Radio symbols

Symbol

Meaning Traffic bulletins switched on HD radio switched on Satellite radio switched on

Telephone symbols

ProCarManuals.com

Symbol

Meaning Incoming or outgoing call Missed call Reception strength of mobile phone network symbol flashing: network search No mobile phone network available Bluetooth switched on Roaming active Receiving text message, email Checking SIM card SIM card blocked SIM card missing Entering PIN

Entertainment symbols

Symbol

Meaning CD/DVD player Music collection Gracenote® database AUX-IN port USB audio interface Mobile phone audio interface

Other

Symbol

Meaning Voice instructions are switched off Querying current vehicle position

With the Professional navigation system: Split screen
General information
Additional information, e.g. from the computer, can be displayed on the right side of the Split screen. This information remains visible on the Split screen even when you change to another menu.
Switching the Split screen on and off

Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting display

Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller until the Split screen is selected.

4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content".

5. Select the desired menu item.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

iDrive At a glance

Programmable memory keys

General information
iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Storing functions

1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

...

Press the desired button for

longer than two seconds.

Executing a function

...

Press the button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.

Symbol

Function
Press the controller: delete one letter or number
Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space

Switching between letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Symbol

Function
Entering letters Entering numbers

Switching between uppercase and lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering uppercase letters and lowercase letters:

> Displaying brief information: Press the button.
> Displaying detailed information: Press and hold the button

Symbol

Function
Move the controller toward the front: to switch from uppercase letters to lowercase letters
Move the controller toward the front: to switch from lowercase letters to uppercase letters

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance iDrive
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. > During entry, only letters for which there are
data are offered. > Destination search: town/city names can be
entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system

ProCarManuals.com

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal notify you that the voice activation system is activated.

The concept
> The voice activation system can be used to control most functions by spoken commands.
> Functions that can only used when the vehicle is stopped cannot be operated using the voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone on the driver's side.
> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates commands for the voice activation system.
> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the answers from the voice activation system.
Prerequisite
On the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system to permit identification of the commands to be spoken. Setting the language, refer to page 94.
Saying commands

If no additional commands are possible, continue by operating the function via iDrive.

Finishing voice input

Press the or

button on the steering wheel

{Cancel}

Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.
The available commands depend on which menu is currently selected on the Control Display.
There are short commands for functions of the main menu.
Some list entries such as phone book entries can also be selected using the voice activation system. Make sure to say list entries the same way as they appear in the respective list.

Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the acoustic signal. 3. Say the command.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

At a glance Voice activation system

Having the possible commands read aloud
To have the available commands read aloud:
{Voice commands}
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands relating to settings are read aloud.
Performing functions using short commands
Functions from the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, essentially regardless of which menu item is selected, e.g. {Vehicle status}. List of short command of the voice activation system, refer to page 290.

Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system uses the standard dialog or a short version. In the short version of the voice dialog, the responses from the system are given in abbreviated form. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select a setting.

ProCarManuals.com

Help dialog for voice activation system
Accessing help: {Help}
Other commands for the help dialog: > {Help with examples}: information about
the current control options and the most important commands relating to them are read aloud. > {Help with voice activation}: information about the principle operation of the voice activation system is read aloud.
Example: playing back a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. {C D and multimedia} The system plays the last media played.
4. Press the button on the steering wheel. 5. {C D track ...} e.g. CD track 4.

Adjusting volume
Turn the volume knob during the spoken instruction to select the desired volume. > The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. > The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 276, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Voice activation system At a glance
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis and speed.
> Always speak the commands in the language of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name: {Station ...} e.g. National Public Radio
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof/panoramic glass roof closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Integrated key

Remote control

Press button 1 to release the key. The integrated key fits the following locks: > Glove compartment, refer to page 126 > Driver's door, refer to page 34

New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

ProCarManuals.com

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 40.
The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 264.

Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing Controls

for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory keys, refer to page 23
> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 32
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 35
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat position, refer to page 53
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 71
> Settings for the display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 91
> Date format, refer to page 91 > Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 94
> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 94
> Units of measure, refer to page 87 > Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC, refer to page 97
> Light settings: > Welcome lamps, refer to page 111 > Pathway lighting, refer to page 111 > Daytime running lights, refer to page 111
> High-beam Assistant, refer to page 113 > Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated air control, setting temperature, air volume and distribution, refer to page 117 ff

> Entertainment: > Setting tone controls, refer to page 171 > Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 172
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following: > Doors > Trunk lid > Fuel filler flap > Convertible: glove compartment
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control > Using the door lock > In cars with Comfort Access, via the handles
on the driver's door and the front passenger door At the same time as locking and unlocking via the remote control: > Welcome lights, the interior light, and the courtesy lighting are switched on and off. > Alarm system, refer to page 37, is armed or disarmed.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 35. In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing: Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.< Convertible: to operate the retractable hardtop with the remote control, the doors and trunk lid must be closed and the cargo area partition must be folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 43.<
Unlocking
Press the button. The interior lamps, the courtesy lighting of the doors, and the welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time. 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"

> "Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.

Coupe: convenient opening
Press and hold the button. The windows and the glass roof are opened.

Convertible: convenient opening
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to open the retractable hardtop.
Hold the button down. The windows and the retractable hardtop are opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the windows move up.
Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing the button interrupts the opening process.<

Locking

Press the

button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

Convertible: convenient closing

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to close the retractable hardtop and the windows.

Press and hold the

button.

The retractable hardtop and the windows are

closed.

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing the button interrupts the closing process.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing Controls

Switching on interior lamps

While the car is locked:

Press the

button.

You can also use this function to locate your

vehicle in parking garages etc.

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button for about 1 second and then release it.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings back and up when opened. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is locked again after closing. Before and after each trip, check that the trunk lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to partially raise the open hardtop for more convenient loading of the cargo area.
1. Briefly press the button and, within one second, press again and hold until the retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate position. The trunk lid opens slightly.
2. Open the trunk lid, press the cargo area partition upward and stow the cargo in the cargo area.
3. Press down the cargo area partition until it engages on both sides and close the trunk lid.
4. Press the button for a longer period to fold the retractable hardtop back in.

4. Press the controller.
Calling up the driver's seat position
The driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use. You can select whether or not the seat is reset to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.< The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."

Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals. 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

ProCarManuals.com

Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the remote control is interrupted briefly, the movement will be completed more quickly if you keep the corresponding button pressed continuously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 40.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS
Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Opening and closing: Using the door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.< With Comfort Access, you can set how the vehicle is unlocked, refer to page 32.
Convenient opening and closing
Coupe: you can operate the windows and the glass sunroof via the door lock. Convertible: you can operate the windows and the retractable hardtop via the door lock. Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.
During each closing procedure, and when opening the retractable hardtop, watch the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Opening and closing Controls

Opening and closing: From inside

Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. Depending on the equipment package, the fuel filler flap can be unlocked as needed.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car locks:
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle after a short time if no door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.

Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button. Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<
Trunk lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the trunk lid.<
Opening from inside

ProCarManuals.com

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it has been locked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

Opening from outside

Emergency release

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The trunk lid will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately

Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<

Coupe

ProCarManuals.com

The switch is located in the glove compartment. 1 Locking the trunk lid 2 Unlocking the trunk lid

Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1. The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system. If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet parking, for example. Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 126.

Convertible
To close the trunk lid, press it down lightly. The lid is closed automatically.<

Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing Controls

Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds: > When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened > To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 38 > When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away > When there has been an interruption of power supply from the battery The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of: > An acoustic alarm > Switching on the hazard warning flashers > Flashing the high beams

Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation: Press the button for at least three seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer to page 32.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
Indicator lamp on inside mirror

Arming and disarming
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock with armed alarm system
In some national-market versions, unlocking via the door lock triggers the alarm. To switch off this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Trunk lid with the alarm system armed
The trunk lid can be opened via the remote control even when the alarm system is armed. Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. The trunk lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.

> The indicator lamp flashes continuously: The system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood, or trunk lid are not properly closed, the remaining components are secured. Then the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and tilt sensor are not active.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: The vehicle has been tampered with.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

Interior motion sensor

Comfort Access

ProCarManuals.com

Coupe
For proper function, the windows and glass sunroof must be closed.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm system is activated together with the interior motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt sensor and interior motion sensor can be deactivated together, for example in the following situations:
> In car washes > In stacking garages > During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer > When leaving animals in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Once the vehicle is locked, press the button on the remote control again
within approx. 10 seconds. The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

The concept
It is possible to access the vehicle without actuating the remote control. It is sufficient to have the remote control with you, for example in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control in the vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle > Convenient closing > Unlocking the trunk lid separately > Engine starting
Functional requirement
> There are no external sources of interference in the vicinity.
> The remote control must be outside the vehicle to lock it.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> It is only possible to start the engine if the remote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote control
The above functions can be controlled by pressing the remote control buttons or by using Comfort Access.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or retractable hardtop, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing Controls

Unlocking

Switching on radio readiness
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches on radio readiness.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; otherwise, the engine will start immediately.

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Touch the surface on the door handle, arrow 2,

with your finger for approx. 1 second.

This corresponds to pressing the

but-

ton.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.<

Coupe: convenient closing
Keep pressing the surface, arrow 2, with your finger.

Convertible: window and convertible top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the locked vehicle's cargo area after the trunk lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal sounds.<

Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 63. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.
Malfunction
Local radio waves can interfere with the function of Comfort Access, for example when a mobile phone is in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or by when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning.
Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a message appears on the Control Display: replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 30.

Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing

Individually

ProCarManuals.com

2. Remove the cover. 3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up. 4. Press the cover on to close.
Dispose of the old battery at a collection point or at your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them. Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.<

> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not close automatically.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Opening and closing Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Jointly

Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise, the pinch protection system could be impaired. Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<

> Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
> Pull the switch: All windows close as long as you pull the switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.
Coupe: Glass roof, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it. Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Convenient opening and closing
For information on Convenient opening and closing via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 32 or 34. For information on Convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 32.

Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing.

Tilting
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

Opening, closing
> Push the switch rearward to the resistance point: The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.
> Push the switch rearward past the resistance point: The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on Convenient opening and closing via the remote control or door lock, refer to page 32 or 34.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work performed by your BMW center.
Closing manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually: 1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270.

ProCarManuals.com

Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the tilted position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.<

2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on each side to press the clips.

3. Remove the control unit.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Opening and closing Controls

ProCarManuals.com

4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270, into the opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable weather protection with simple and convenient operation. The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your Convertible: > It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather damage, it also offers theft protection. However, even when the hardtop is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo area.

> Do not attach roof rack systems to the retractable hardtop, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the trunk lid, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated, the trunk lid swings back and up. Before operating the retractable hardtop, ensure that there is enough clearance, e.g. when parked in front of a wall.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo area. If necessary, remove items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.
Do not place any objects on the retractable hardtop or on the trunk lid; otherwise, they could fall during movements of the retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury. Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the activated position. Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or closed may result in damage or injury. Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure. Keep children away from the swiveling area of the retractable hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved at temperatures below +147/106. A message appears on the Control Display.<
The retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not drive off until the hardtop has stopped moving.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions described above.
> Ensure that the cargo area partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 130; otherwise, it will not be possible to open the retractable hardtop.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

ProCarManuals.com

> Do not place any objects next to or on the cargo area partition and close the storage compartment on the left side of the cargo area.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height under the cargo area partition; refer to the label in the cargo area showing a line indicating the maximum height.
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a lamp.
Before moving the hardtop, make sure that there are no objects on or next to the cargo area partition, the storage compartment on the left side of the cargo area is closed, and the maximum loading height in the cargo area has not been exceeded; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Opening and closing
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 61:
If possible, conserve the battery by only operating the retractable hardtop when the engine is running. Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly.<

The side windows move down when the switch for hardtop operation is pulled or pushed.<
LEDs
In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the switch, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the switch is pressed, the cargo area partition is folded up, the trunk lid is not closed, the vehicle is standing on a strong incline or there is a malfunction. The retractable hardtop cannot be moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard. Do not interrupt and resume the closing procedure several times in close succession as this could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened and the windows cannot be moved.<

1 Push button: open the retractable hardtop. Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2 LEDs

Convenient opening and closing with remote control or via door lock
Refer to pages 32 and 34.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Opening and closing Controls

Wind deflector
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the hardtop is open and provides an even more comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.

4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the opening provided on the left side of the vehicle until it snaps into place.

Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective cover in the cargo area. Brief instructions for operation can be found on the protective cover. 1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.

5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflector.
With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the range between the two symbols; otherwise, the cable system inside the wind deflector could be damaged.<

3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the opening provided on the right side of the vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the protective caps beforehand, if necessary.

Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for installation.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for the holders of the wind deflector.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Opening and closing

Folding

To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag holders, you can fold the rear backrest down, refer to page 130.

Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.
Loading function
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the vehicle even if the wind deflector has been installed. 1. Lower all windows. 2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.

ProCarManuals.com

3. Turn the rotary handle to position , arrow 2.

Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Adjustments

Adjustments Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a particular vehicle, for example due to the options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 57.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing should come between the airbags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag deploys. Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean

against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise, serious injuries can result if the airbag deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 107.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 50.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise, the belt could slide over your hips and

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Adjustments

injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 53.

Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages properly.

ProCarManuals.com

Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 50, and on damaged safety belts on page 54.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<

Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Angle

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Thigh support

Adjustments Controls
Lumbar support

ProCarManuals.com

Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width

1 Longitudinal direction 2 Height 3 Angle

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.

4 Backrest 5 Convertible: head restraints Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints below.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Adjustments

Longitudinal adjustment from outside/behind
To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.<

Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will not be ensured and its full potential in reducing the risk of injury in the event of a rear collision may not be realized. In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the active head restraints have been triggered, have the testing, repair, or disassembly performed only by your BMW center or a workshop that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Height adjustment

ProCarManuals.com

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers that could impair the function of the active head restraint. Do not hang any items, e.g. clothes hangers, directly on the head restraints. Attach only BMW approved accessories to the seat or head restraint.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Convertible: front seats Height adjustment

Adjustments Controls
Coupe: rear seats Height adjustment

> To raise: press the button upward. > To lower: press the button downward.
Adjusting the distance to the back of the head

> To raise: pull up. > To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. 1. Pull up as far as it will go. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head restraint all the way out.

> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and push the head cushion toward the rear.
Do not insert objects behind the head cushion; otherwise, the head restraint may not function properly.<

Entering the rear seats
Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal adjustment

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Adjustments

Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

ProCarManuals.com

Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured and that no objects are damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment
Coupe

Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<

Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp: Lights up when a seat backrest is not engaged. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Adjustments Controls

Seat heating

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the

button.

The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Press the button once per temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature. To switch off: Press button longer. If you continue driving within approx. the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature. The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's seat and exterior mirror positions. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing

Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are driving; otherwise, unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.<

Comfort function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch on radio readiness, refer to page 61.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature

1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 61.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the

button was pressed accidentally:

Press the button again; the LED goes out.

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 61.

Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Adjustments

only at your BMW center. Otherwise correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Coupe: belt hand-over

Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 48.

The concept
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to fasten your safety belt. When you close the door and switch on radio readiness or the ignition, the belt hand-over extends automatically and presents the in a position that is convenient for fastening it around you. After you have fastened your safety belt, the belt hand-over retracts to its original position.

ProCarManuals.com

Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the buckle. 3. Guide the belt into its reel.

"Fasten safety belts" reminder for driver's and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger safety belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt system, including any belt tensioners or child restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out

Even if you have not yet fastened your safety belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you: > Wait for more than approx. one minute > Open the corresponding door > Start driving. Closing the respective door reactivates the belt hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is occupied and after the front passenger door is closed.
Pinch protection system
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the opposite direction and stops in this position. To reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close the door or switch the ignition off and on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Adjustments Controls

Although there is a pinch protection system, always check that the maneuvering area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it cannot be ensured that the system will stop moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors

rors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that have been folded in fold out automatically at a speed of approx. 24 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors manually or with button 3 to prevent them from being damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<

Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Passenger side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor

Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the driver's side mirror, arrow 1.

ProCarManuals.com

1 Adjustments 2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor 3 Folding mirrors in and out The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/ 20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mir-

2. Shift into reverse or engage the selector lever- or transmission position R. The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passenger side mirror, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Adjustments
Interior rearview mirror

Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion; otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the headlamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

ProCarManuals.com

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated position. 3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating

Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the steering wheel heating is switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

ProCarManuals.com

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 107.
Convertible: key switch for passenger belt

The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only in the rear in suitable child restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child restraint system.<

The passenger safety belt can be locked with a key switch so that it is prevented from being pulled out. The key switch is situated on the side surface of the passenger-side dashboard.
Locking the passenger belt
Lock the passenger belt to install a child restraint system. Insert key and push in. Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the stop at the position. Pull key out at this stop.
After removing the key, make sure that the switch is in the position; otherwise, the locking action on the safety belt is not guaranteed.<
Unlocking the passenger belt
If no child restraint system is fastened to the front passenger seat, unlock the passenger belt; otherwise, the freedom of movement of the upper body is limited. Insert key and push in.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Transporting children safely

Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the stop at the position. Pull key out at this stop.
Make sure that the passenger belt is unlocked; otherwise, the front passenger may become trapped by the safety belt.<

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 49.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security

ProCarManuals.com

Installing child restraint systems
Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting, installing and using child restraint systems. Otherwise, the protective effect may be diminished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.
Backrest width
The backrest width of the front passenger seat must be at its widest possible setting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stability on the front passenger seat is limited.<

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out. 3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Transporting children safely Controls

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Mounts for lower LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Coupe
Use the tether strap anchors to secure child restraint systems only; otherwise, the anchors could be damaged.<

ProCarManuals.com

For child restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.
Installing LATCH child restraint systems
1 Installing child restraint system, refer to the system operating instructions.
2 Make sure that both LATCH anchors are correctly locked in position.

Coupe
Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.<

Child restraint system with tether strap

Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Transport Canada.
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Anchor 5 Rear window shelf 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys-
tem

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Transporting children safely
If necessary, fold the anchors upward before use. 1. Push the head restraint upward. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders. 3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor. 4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position. 5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Driving

Driving Controls

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism. > The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/Stop button

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

ProCarManuals.com

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock. > Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 38.
Removing the remote control from the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.<

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: when you press the Start/Stop button and depress the clutch, the engine starts. Automatic transmission and Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: when you press the Start/Stop button and depress the brake pedal, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 39

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.<

ProCarManuals.com

Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas; otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, always shift into neutral or selector lever/ transmission position P and apply the parking brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from rolling.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 38. 1. Depress the brake. 2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 38. 1. Depress the brake. 2. Move the selector lever to position P. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 38. 1. Depress the brake. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine starts independent of the current transmission position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Driving Controls

Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle. When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/ Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Forcefully apply the parking brake. 4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 61.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Forcefully apply the parking brake. 4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 61.

Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still applied. Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/ Stop button. If the transmission is shifted into N when the engine is switched off, you will be notified visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61. The transmission is automatically shifted into transmission position P.

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving
Manual transmission

Displays in the instrument cluster

ProCarManuals.com

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 65.

The selector lever position is displayed and, in manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S +

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Driving Controls

R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are selected automatically. Under normal operating conditions, fuel consumption is lowest when you are driving in position D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the fullthrottle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S

When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.
Changing gears using shifting paddles on steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

ProCarManuals.com

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. To deactivate the sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot:

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle .

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

ProCarManuals.com

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden: 1. Switch off ignition. 2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
4. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270, press the red lever and with the button pressed, simultaneously move the selector lever to the desired position.
7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
The concept
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch is an automated manual transmission with two clutches and secondary gear

sets in which the clutching and shifting is handled by an electrohydraulic system. With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch, the gears are shifted without an interruption in driving power.
You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch using the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Either manual or automatic mode: sequential mode or drive mode
> Automatic downshifting and protection against incorrect gear selection, even in sequential mode
> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control, refer to page 70
> Automatic intermediate throttle application
System limitations
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch has an overheating protection that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if the transmission becomes too warm. Avoid high engine loads and frequent accelerations from zero. If the transmission is overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It is only possible to continue driving once the transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmission to overheat.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S +

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Displays in the instrument cluster

Driving Controls
Shifting into P

ProCarManuals.com

The selector lever position and the engaged gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of position P only with the engine running: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not be executed: shiftlock.
Shifting into N, D, R

Press the button P.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with the engine running, you open the driver's door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon as you switch off the engine, unless the transmission is in N and the remote control is in the ignition lock, refer to page 267. As soon as you remove the remote control from the ignition lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, overcoming a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also displayed on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the transmission remains in N if you leave the remote control in the ignition lock. You can use this function at a car wash, for example, refer to page 267.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as passing, depress the accelerator past the resistance point. This provides maximum acceleration.
Sport program and manual mode M/S

> At a stop, the transmission is automatically shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a geardependent minimum speed, the transmission automatically downshifts without your intervention.
Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode, you can skip over several gears in order to achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so, depress the accelerator past the resistance point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector lever to the right.

ProCarManuals.com

Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your foot off the accelerator when doing so.

Push selector lever toward the left from the selector lever position D, the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style. The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that could cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

Using the selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift paddles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode if the selector lever is in position D.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Driving Controls

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle .
Driving dynamics control
The driving dynamics control permits you, at the push of a button, to have your BMW react in an even more sporty fashion when driving: > Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range. > Gear changes occur more quickly. > The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.

Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interruption such as a discharged or disconnected battery or an electrical malfunction, the parking lock must be manually unlocked; otherwise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the vehicle cannot be towed.<
Only unlock the parking lock manually for towing and make sure to set the parking brake forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle is parked.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

Activating the system

3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit, refer to page 270, rotate the cover until it reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

ProCarManuals.com

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button lights up and SPORT appears in the info display.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again. > Switch off the engine. The LED in the button goes out and SPORT disappears from the info display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

ProCarManuals.com

4. Insert allen wrench into the opening, arrow 1.
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked. Do not turn allen wrench in the opposite direction; otherwise, you may damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening. After parking the vehicle, lock the parking lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow. The parking lock is locked again.
2. Replace cover again. 3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place. 4. Forcefully apply the parking brake. Jump-starting and towing, starting on page 279.

Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum acceleration when starting off on a road surface with good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, the powerful stresses on the vehicle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for approx. 6.2 miles/10 km.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC), refer to page 98.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to page 69.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the manual mode and select 1st gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator pedal past the resistance point. The engine speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehicle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during the break-in phase, refer to page 138.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC activated whenever possible.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

Driving Controls

ProCarManuals.com

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal

Wiper system

Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator has failed.<
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times. You can activate or deactivate this function. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor 4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset. If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

ProCarManuals.com

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the container.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Driving Controls
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended period.
One lever for all functions

ProCarManuals.com

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir. Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column. In order to maintain the specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle when the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is activated. The system is deactivated when you

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a previously stored speed
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when cruise control is deactivated due to control intervention by the DSC, for example. A message appears on the Control Display.

ProCarManuals.com

Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
> When the brakes are applied.
> When the manual transmission is shifted very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports automatic transmission with double clutch is moved into the neutral position.
> When DTC is activated or DSC is deactivated.
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.

Resuming a previously stored speed
Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed is resumed and maintained. In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed: > When driving stability control systems are
intervening. > In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral. > In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N. > In cars with Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selector lever position N. > When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Driving Controls

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is possible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 93.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. The cruise control is malfunctioning. You can continue your journey. Have the system checked.
Active Cruise Control
The concept
With Active Cruise Control, you can select a desired speed which is not only automatically maintained when driving on open roadways, but also varied to maintain a selected distance setting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active Cruise Control is a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on highways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Especially on longer trips, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify the distance to be maintained from the vehicle in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the distance is speed-dependent. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automatically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to signal a following driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-

mission your vehicle is equipped with, to maintain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected by increasing the throttle setting and shifting gears automatically or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed will be held when driving downhill, too.
Since this Active Cruise Control system is a new technology and operates differently from conventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Pay special attention to the System limitations section beginning on page 80.
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the system is braking, pedal sensation will be slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is activated. The system is deactivated when you drive at very low engine speeds for an extended period.
Range of applications
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or 30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is 110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control systems, Active Cruise Control in no way diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own personal responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active Cruise Control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

ProCarManuals.com

hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway offramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving situations could result that pose the risk of accidents.<
One lever for all functions
1 Store and increase desired speed 2 Store and decrease desired speed 3 Deactivate system, refer to page 77 4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 78 5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 77
Storing current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull the lever, arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.

The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or briefly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed to the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of 110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those described under Increasing desired speed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Selecting distance

Driving Controls
Deactivating cruise control

ProCarManuals.com

> Press downward: Increase distance.
> Press upward: Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4 This is always the preset distance when you use the system for the first time after starting the engine. Use good judgment to select the appropriate following distance given road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<

Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
> When the brakes are applied.
> The speed is reduced to below 20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation.
> When the manual transmission is shifted very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports automatic transmission with double clutch is moved into the neutral position.
> When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.
> When Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deactivated.
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.
> The system does not recognize any objects for a longer time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 78.
> The parking brake is engaged.
When the system is deactivated, you must brake the vehicle yourself and/or maneuver as necessary; otherwise, there is a risk of accidents.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving

ProCarManuals.com

Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when Active Cruise Control has been automatically deactivated, for example due to a driving speed below 20 mph or 30 km/h or a DSC intervention. A message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming stored desired speed and distance
Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed and distance are regained and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are intervening.
> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral.
> In cars with automatic transmission: when you engage selector lever position N.
> In cars with Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: when you engage selector lever position N.
> When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the system is activated.
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily displayed
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is possible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 93.<
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 flashes in red; a signal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Active Cruise Control cannot automatically restore the distance to the vehicle ahead. This indicator does not release you from your responsibility to adapt your desired speed and driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow. The prerequisites for operating Active Cruise Control are not met, e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC interventions. Active Cruise Control is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if desired, by briefly pressing or pulling the lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It is not possible to resume a stored speed.

Radar sensor

1 Stored desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain distance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control systems are intervening; cruise control is deactivated

The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure to use particular care when removing any layers of snow or ice from the sensor.
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is incorrectly aligned.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID: NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000
Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. The Active Cruise Control is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.

Driving Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Driving
System limitations

ProCarManuals.com

Always remember that the range and ability of the system does have physical limitations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle, or stationary object ahead of you, for example at a traffic light or when approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback. The system may also not detect smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the system will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alertness.<
Active Cruise Control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected. Be aware that changing to a clear, unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway offramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.
While Active Cruise Control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the system to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. Therefore, the system cannot decrease your speed for large differences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<
Active Cruise Control can only decelerate the vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Swerving vehicles

Driving Controls

ProCarManuals.com

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane into your lane, Active Cruise Control will not recognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to maintain the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of collision. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Take action yourself; otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves

In approaching a curve, it is possible that Active Cruise Control would react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceleration by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you press the accelerator pedal while driving with Active Cruise Control, the automatic braking function will be temporarily interrupted. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the desired speed or the selected distance to the vehicle ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator pedal and make sure that no objects such as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal. Otherwise, the system may not be able to brake the vehicle.<

Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be recognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview
Controls overview

Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 90.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should therefore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

ProCarManuals.com

1 Knob in the instrument cluster 2 Outside temperature display and clock 3 Odometer and trip odometer

When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to page 87.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Tachometer

Controls overview Controls
Fuel gauge

ProCarManuals.com

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.1 US gal/ 61 liters.
You can find information on refueling on page 237.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/ 50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid cornering, engine functions are not always assured.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/ 150 6.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview

Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster Calling up information

Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 85, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

ProCarManuals.com

Press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever. The following items of information are displayed in the order listed: > Cruising range > Average speed > Average fuel consumption > Current fuel consumption > No information To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 87.

Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the Control Display below.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Displays on the Control Display
The computer can also be opened via iDrive. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Displaying "Onboard info":

Controls overview Controls
Resetting the trip computer
You can reset all values: 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset"

> Cruising range > Distance from destination > Estimated time of arrival if a destination has
been entered in the navigation system, refer to page 150.
Displaying "Trip computer":

ProCarManuals.com

> Departure time > Trip duration > Trip distance Both displays show: > The average speed and > the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and speed
You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption: 1. Select the respective menu entry. 2. Press the controller to confirm your selec-
tion.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview
Settings and information
Operating principle

ProCarManuals.com

1 Button for: > Selecting display > Setting values
2 Button for: > Confirming selected display or set values > Calling up computer information 84
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 114
4 Calling up Check Control 92

5 Checking oil level 260 6 Setting the time 90 7 Setting the date 91 8 Viewing service requirement display 87
Exiting displays
The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption, route/distance, temperature and pressure. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

Controls overview Controls

3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICEINFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

Service requirements

ProCarManuals.com

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your dealership Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview
Possible displays

1 Button for selecting functions 2 Service requirements 3 Engine oil 4 Roadworthiness test

5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads 7 Brake fluid The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls overview Controls

More information
Detailed information on service requirements
You can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"

ProCarManuals.com

3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed. You can request more detailed information on every entry: Select the entry and press the controller. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. The service deadline has already passed.

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. 6. "Date:" 7. Create the settings. 8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted. 9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment. 10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left. More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 264.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 91; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was notified.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes. 6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

ProCarManuals.com

3. "Options" 4. "Last Service Request"

Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 30.

2. "Settings"

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the time format below.

Setting the time
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Controls overview Controls

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format and press the
controller. The time format is stored.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2. The system stores the new date.

Setting time zone
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone:" 4. Select desired time zone. The time zone is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 30.
Setting the date

Via iDrive
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller. 5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year. The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:"

In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview

Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. This type of Check Control message includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some cases, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Supplemental text messages
You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control.

Indicator and warning lamps

ProCarManuals.com

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The text of urgent messages is displayed automatically. To exit the display: Select "OK" and press the Controller.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, you can select from among the following functions in the supplementary text messages. > "Service request"
Contact your BMW center. > "Roadside Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages

Indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. These Check Control messages can be viewed again later, refer to page 93.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Press the button on the turn signal/high beam lever.
> Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and remain visible until the malfunction has been rectified. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Controls overview Controls

These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this, they are displayed again automatically.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
Displaying stored Check Control messages

3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2. If there are no Check Control messages, then "CHECK OK" is displayed. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp lights up. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Displaying, setting or changing the limit
1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed.
5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Controls overview
Applying your current speed as the limit
1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed"

3. "Language:"

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the desired dialog.

ProCarManuals.com

4. Press the controller.
Settings on the Control Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

3. "Brightness"

Controls overview Controls

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Technology for driving comfort and safety

Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.
Switching on manually
When parking in the forward direction, the sensors must be switched on manually to enable them to signal an approach to an object in front of or behind the vehicle.

Park Distance Control PDC

ProCarManuals.com

The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object in front of or behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the front sensors and rear corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; otherwise, physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. one second when you shift into reverse or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. For example, if an object is detected behind the vehicle, the signal tone sounds from the rear. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds. An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds > If you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner sensors > If you are driving parallel to a wall.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
Manual operation
The LED above the button also flashes.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<

Driving stability control systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 140.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

ProCarManuals.com

safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed. In the same way as with a differential interlock, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a significant loss of traction. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC controls the driving and braking forces. If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed. The indicator lamp lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster: DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: > When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads > When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground > When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the driving and braking forces. If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed. The indicator lamp lights up and TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

xDrive
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system. The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and road conditions.

Activating HDC

Hill Descent Control HDC
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls your speed on steep downhill gradients and makes it even easier to control your BMW's handling under these conditions. The vehicle then moves slightly faster than double walking speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically reduced to slightly more than double walking speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
By accelerating or braking you can change this speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph, approx. 5 to 25 km/h. You can specify a target speed within the same range by using the lever of the cruise control.

Press the button; the LED lights up. When the vehicle is being braked automatically, the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds greater than approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
In cars with manual transmission: Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear. With automatic transmission: You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster

ProCarManuals.com

1 To increase speed 2 To decrease speed

1 Display for target speed 2 HDC display
Malfunction
The HDC display disappears during HDC operation, or does not appear: HDC is temporarily unavailable due to excessive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

ProCarManuals.com

Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this. 1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake. 2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay. The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires. The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.< A natural, steady pressure loss in all four tires is not detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction: > System has not been initialized > Driving on snowy or slippery road surface > Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration > Snow chains are attached
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reinitialize the system.

The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset". 6. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps light up in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire pressure. 1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing to drive can result in serious accidents.< When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h. When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, outside temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

101

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

ProCarManuals.com

Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.< The system does not function correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire:
> When a wheel without TPM electronics is installed.
> Interference with TPM by other systems or devices with the same transmission frequency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only required when this is indicated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the desired state. "TPM active" appears in the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire.
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture. Reasons for this may be:

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

> TPM is being reset. > Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency. > Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset"

Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps light up in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a low tire pressure is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

4. Start the engine do not drive away.
5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting "Reset".
6. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. The tires are depicted in green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting continues automatically.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting, all tires on the Control Display are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is displayed.<

Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. The system must then be reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

103

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

ProCarManuals.com

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, outside temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate complete failure of the tire. Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<
Message for unsuccessful system reset
Yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
The system has detected a wheel change, but was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible at the current inflation pressures.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 103.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow. The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display. No punctures can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been installed: Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Malfunction Have the system checked.
> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to complete the resetting process. Reset the system again.
The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow. The tires appear in gray in the Control Display. No punctures can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency: The system automatically becomes active again when the vehicle moves out of the interference zone.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel movements. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very direct and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced as the speed increases. This improves the handling of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 98.
Malfunction
The warning lamps light up and a message is displayed on the Control Display. Active steering is malfunctioning or is temporarily deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an initialization. A message indicates that the feature is deactivated. Initialization may take several minutes. If the message does not disappear during the current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
If there is a defect, a corresponding text message appears. Have the system checked.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels relative to the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering force is strongly assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering. As the vehicle speed increases, the steering assisting power is reduced.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

105

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. Servotronic is malfunctioning or has failed. Steering response will be different. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking. On the right: sharp braking.

ProCarManuals.com

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Airbags

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

ProCarManuals.com

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on page 47 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or modify them in any other way. Keep the dashboard and windows on the front passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments or mobile phones. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with

integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the airbag system has been triggered, have the testing, repair, or disassembly and scrapping of gas generators performed only by your BMW center or a workshop that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

107

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 57. The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system, This particularly applies to child seats that were required by NHTSA at the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system

Status of front passenger airbags

ProCarManuals.com

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front passenger front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

As of radio readiness, refer to page 61, the warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay; otherwise, there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.<

2. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.

Convertible: rollover protection system
The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a critical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact. The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear. In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on accident severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.

5. Repeat the procedure for the other protection bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the activated position. Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling. Work on the rollover protection system should be performed only by your BMW center. Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation. To check the system and ensure flawless longterm operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 87.<

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

109

Controls Lamps
Lamps

Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the lefthand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 112.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

ProCarManuals.com

0 Lamps off, daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights 2 Low beams,
welcome lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant, and Adaptive Light Control
Parking lamps/low beams, automatic headlamp control
General information
When the driver's door is opened with ignition switched off, then the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2, or 3.

Automatic headlamp control
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient lighting conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adaptive Light Control is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lights, refer to page 111. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lights to low beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.<

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Lamps Controls

Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.

4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.
The tail lamps may also light up.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If the headlamp flasher is activated after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lights
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"

Setting duration
1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.:"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

111

Controls Lamps

ProCarManuals.com

Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 110. The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.
Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light toward the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are switched on and active on both sides.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps
1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for a longer period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Lamps Controls

High-beam Assistant
The concept
This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. It handles this task for you and gives you the benefit of the best possible view. You can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 110.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever in the direction of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high beams are activated. The system automatically switches from high beams to low beams and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic, traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Switching the high beams on and off manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation requires, you can intervene:
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the high beams, but you would like to drive with the low beams, simply switch off the high beams using the turn signal/high beam lever. This deactivates the High-beam Assistant. To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the low beams, but you would like to drive with the high beams, switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and the high beams need to be switched off manually, if necessary. To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the low beams switched on.
System limitations
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror using a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

113

Controls Lamps
Activating via iDrive
1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "High beam assistant"

Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

ProCarManuals.com

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Fog lamps

1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness setting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, entry lamps, cargo area lamp, and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically. The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

To reduce the drain on the battery, a few minutes after the radio readiness is switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 61, all lights in the vehicle's passenger compartment are switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Lamps Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Interior lamps, front and rear: To switch on and off, press the button. To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps, and courtesy lamps permanently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps

There are reading lamps at the front and rear, next to the interior lights. To switch on and off, press the button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

115

Controls Climate
Climate

not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

ProCarManuals.com

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 119

3 Air to the footwell 4 Air distribution, manual 5 Temperature, left side

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

6 Maximum cooling 7 AUTO program 8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO
intensity 9 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/
Recirculated air mode 10 Temperature, right side 11 ALL program

Climate Controls
12 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually 14 Rear window defroster 15 Seat heating, right side 53 16 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear 17 Seat heating, left side 53

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 31.

Adjusting air distribution manually

footwell.

The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

The automatic air distribution can be switched back on by pressing the AUTO button. The cooling function is switched on automatically and the manual air distribution setting is cleared.

Temperature
Turn to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.
Avoid rapid switching between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button. The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air volume and recirculated air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
> Above an outside temperature of approx. 32 7/0 6
> When the engine is running

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

117

Controls Climate

AUTO program

matically.

Press the button. Air volume, air distribution and temperature are controlled auto-

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed toward the windshield, the side windows, the upper body and the footwell.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

The program is switched off when the air distribution is set manually or the button is pressed again.

ProCarManuals.com

Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to increase it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the hardtop is open and the AUTO program is switched on. In the Convertible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the hardtop open. In addition, the air volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible program can be enhanced considerably by installing the wind deflector.<

Adjusting air volume manually
To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button to reduce the air volume. Press the right side of the button to increase it.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated air control AUC/Recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously. > Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated air mode and increase the air volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated air mode should not be used over an extended period of time; otherwise, the air quality inside the car will deteriorate continuously.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recirculated air mode and the previous mode using a button on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Climate Controls

ALL program
Press the button. The current temperature setting on the driver's side is transferred to the front passenger side. If the temperature setting on the driver's side is changed, the temperature on the front passenger side is changed as well. The program is switched off when the setting is adjusted on the front passenger side or the button is pressed again.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation
Press the button. Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.
Switching cooling function on/off
The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and depending on the temperature setting warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Switching the system on/off
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic climate control. All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on. The outside air supply is blocked when the automatic climate control is switched off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button except the ALL or the rear window defroster button to reactivate the automatic climate control.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents
2 Use the levers to change the direction of the airflow
3 Thumbwheel for more or less cool air from the vents for the upper body area
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot in the car.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

119

Controls Climate

Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear

Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate parked-car vent."

ProCarManuals.com

1 Use the thumbwheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder > Turn toward red: warmer 2 Use the thumbwheel to smoothly open and close the air vents
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2". 4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

Parked car ventilation

The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The system can also be switched on and off directly.

5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display flashes when the system has switched on.
The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<

Climate Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

121

Controls Practical interior accessories
Practical interior accessories

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote control
The concept
The Integrated universal remote control can be used to operate up to 3 functions of remotecontrolled devices such as garage door openers or lighting systems. The Integrated universal remote control thus replaces as many as three different hand-held transmitters. To operate them, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. Programming requires the hand-held transmitter for the respective device.
To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the integrated universal remote control to operate a device, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter.<
For security reasons, make sure to delete the stored functions before selling the vehicle, refer to page 124.

Compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the device to be operated, you can generally assume that the device is compatible with the Integrated universal remote control. For additional questions, please consult: > Your BMW center. > www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
1 LED 2 Buttons 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro-
gramming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial operation:
Simultaneously hold down the right and left buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes. All programs of the buttons on the rearview mirror are deleted.

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories Controls

ProCarManuals.com

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be programmed on the inside mirror.
The LED on the inside mirror will flash slowly at first.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates that the button on the inside mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash rapidly within 60 seconds, change the distance between the inside mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat this step. This may require several attempts. Allow at least 15 seconds between attempts.
6. To program additional functions on the other buttons of the inside mirror, repeat steps 3 through 5.
The buttons on the inside mirror can be used to operate the devices if the ignition is switched on.
Special procedure with alternatingcode systems
If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the device to be controlled uses an alternating-code system.
To do so, either read the instructions for the device or hold down the programmed button on the inside mirror. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes quickly at first and then remains lit for 2 seconds, the device uses an alternating-code system. The LED flashes and lights up repeatedly for approx. 20 seconds.
In devices with an alternating-code system, the Integrated universal remote control and the device must also be synchronized.

For information about synchronizing can also be found in the operating instructions for the device to be set.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.
Synchronizing:
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
2. Program the Integrated universal remote control as described above.
3. Locate and press the synchronization button on the device to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds to perform the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the inside mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat this operation, up to three times if necessary, to complete the synchronization. If the synchronization has succeeded, the programmed function is performed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm bis 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the desired button on the inside mirror.
4. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the hand-held transmitter.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step or, if the programming

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

123

Controls Practical interior accessories

by means of the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the button on the inside mirror and then press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter several times, holding it down for 2 seconds each time.

Digital compass

ProCarManuals.com

Operation
To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the integrated universal remote control to operate a device, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter.<
The button on the inside mirror can be used to operate the device, for example the garage door, if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. To do so, within the reception range of the device, press the button of the device until the function is triggered. The LED on the inside mirror remains lit during transmission of the radio signal.
Deleting stored functions
Simultaneously hold down the right and left buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

1 Adjustment button 2 Display The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed: > Press briefly: switch display on/off > 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone > 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass > 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering > 12 to 15 seconds: set the language

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories Controls

Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the com-

pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

ProCarManuals.com

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown. > The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop fully and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to righthand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

125

Controls Practical interior accessories

Set the language
You can set the language of the display: Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Press the adjustment button again briefly to switch between English "E" and German "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.
Coupe: Roller sunblinds

Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 30. Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the outside, the glove compartment is locked as well.
USB interface for data transmission

ProCarManuals.com

Briefly press the button in the center console to raise or lower the roller sunblind.
Glove compartment
Opening

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections, refer to page 189.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven, close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter, depending on the equipment version.

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Adjustments

Practical interior accessories Controls
Do not place unsecured objects in them; otherwise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in the event of braking or evasive maneuvers.< Do not place non-slip pads, e.g. anti-slip mats, on the dashboard; the materials of these pads may damage it.<
Storage compartments in the rear console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment version, the following storage compartments can be found in the rear console:

ProCarManuals.com

Slide the center armrest on the driver's side into the desired position.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the vehicle speakers: > AUX-IN port, refer to page 194 > USB audio interface/extended connectivity
of the music player in the mobile phone, refer to page 195.

> Storage tray > Storage compartment with cover > Cupholders
Coupe: clothes hooks

Storage compartments inside the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find compartments beside the steering column, in the front doors and in the center console. Nets are provided on the front-seat backrests.

Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

127

Controls Practical interior accessories

Cupholders
Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cupholders; otherwise, damage could result.<

Convertible: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear console.

Front

ProCarManuals.com

Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in the cupholder.

Press the button to open. Before folding down the rear seat backrest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cupholder and close it. Do not place objects into the cupholder and use force to close it. Do not use the cupholder as a grab handle.<
Ashtray
Opening

Coupe: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear center armrest.

Press the front of the armrest.

Push the ridge on the cover.

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Practical interior accessories Controls

Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter

Connecting electrical appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sockets is available.
The total load of all sockets should not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets built into the vehicle at the plant; doing so may damage the vehicle.<

Cigarette lighter socket
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter out of the socket.

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Socket in the front passenger footwell
A socket is located under the glove compartment on the left.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 127.
Coupe: socket in cargo area

Open the cap.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

129

Controls Practical interior accessories

Coupe: Through-loading system
Opening

Convertible: Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo area

ProCarManuals.com

1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.< The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you with a way to attach cargo area nets or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 143.

When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the cargo area: To do so, push the cargo area partition upward.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo area partition down until it engages on both sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that there are no objects on or next to the cargo area partition; otherwise, parts of the hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in the cargo area showing a line indicating the maximum height. Do not use force to push down the cargo area partition.< The retractable hardtop can only be opened if the cargo area partition is in its lowermost position and engaged on both sides.<
Folding down the rear seat backrest
Opening

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories Controls

You can fold down the rear seat backrest to transport light objects in the rear without damaging the seats. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mounting points for the cargo area net are found on the rear panel of the backrest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the button on the driver's or the opposite side.

Storage compartment behind the rear seat backrest

Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.<
Bag holder

A storage compartment is located behind the rear seat backrest. To access the storage compartment: remove the insert or fold down the rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded down or the insert has been removed, only transport small light objects in the storage compartment; otherwise, braking maneuvers and swerving, for example, may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.<

ProCarManuals.com

When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you will find two bag holders on the cargo area wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the button.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other suitable objects from the holders; otherwise, braking maneuvers and swerving, for example, may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle, refer to page 141.

Storage compartments inside the cargo area
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo area:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jackets, depending on vehicle equipment version
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags or tote bags

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

131

Controls Practical interior accessories

> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo area
Convertible
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo area:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the cargo area. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Rubber strap for subdividing the cargo area; can be hooked onto the lateral lashing eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor panel

Coupe: ski bag
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards. With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.9 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft 10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest. 2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.

ProCarManuals.com

Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 55 lbs./25 kg for the storage compartment under the floor panel; otherwise, damage may result.<
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the catch.

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap into the eyelet.

Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the opening at the rear of the panel.

Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo area for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, refer to page 143.

Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories Controls

Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.< To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts. 1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest. 2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you can remove the insert and use the transport bag with the regular through-loading opening. To transport larger objects, you can fold down the rear seat backrest to create an expanded through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.2 ft/1.90 m. When skis of 6.2 ft/ 1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
1. For loading using the regular through-loading opening: Press the button down and remove the insert from the front. For loading with the through-loading opening expanded: Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 130.

ProCarManuals.com

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

133

Controls Practical interior accessories

2. Front cover: press the two recesses together and fold the cover down until it engages.

Securing cargo

ProCarManuals.com

3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.

After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.< To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the front cover

4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out the transport bag between the front seats.
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap into the belt buckle under the transport bag.

You can remove the front cover to use the full height of the through-loading opening. With the cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow, and remove the cover toward the front. To replace, insert the cover at an angle from above and let it snap it into place.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport bag if you do not need its full length.

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories Controls

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

135

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

ProCarManuals.com

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode.

Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consumption and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary. Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the highest applicable gear. On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accelerator and coast in a suitable gear. The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat heating or rear window defroster draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at your BMW center. Also note the BMW service system, refer to page 264.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to do so may endanger passengers or other road users or may damage the vehicle in the event of an accident or a braking and evasive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow into the passenger compartment.< If special circumstances make it absolutely necessary to drive with the trunk open: 1. Close all windows and the glass roof. 2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to page 118. 3. Drive cautiously.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

139

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

ProCarManuals.com

Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust system, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Mobile phones in the vehicle
It is not advisable to use wireless devices such as mobile phones inside the vehicle without a direct connection to an external aerial. Otherwise, it is not possible to exclude the possibility of a reciprocal interference occurring between the vehicle electronics and the wireless device. Otherwise, there is no assurance that the radiation generated by the radio transmission will be conveyed out of the passenger compartment.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 256.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 100.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the movement range of the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals; otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system, drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 65.
Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: never drive with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Manual transmission: never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be impaired.<

When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. In some situations, this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.< Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo area, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.<
Determining loading limit

Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

141

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Coupe Convertible

Load

ProCarManuals.com

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners. > For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

ProCarManuals.com

Securing cargo Coupe
Convertible

weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 287; otherwise, excessive loads can pose a safety hazard and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 59; otherwise, these could be damaged.<

Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack
A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

> Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps, a cargo area net, or draw straps.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two are located on the side walls of the cargo area 1, two additional ones are located on the inside wall of the cargo area 2. Please note the information supplied with the cargo straps.
Convertible: before opening the hardtop, fold down the cargo area partition. Make sure the cargo area is loaded correctly; otherwise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer to page 130.<
Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle

The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 287.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

143

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the trunk lid. Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip. Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

ProCarManuals.com

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

145

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Navigation
This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Navigation Navigation system
Navigation system

ProCarManuals.com

General information
The navigation system can determine the precise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.<
Accessing navigation system

Press the button.

2. "Navigation"

The navigation system can also be accessed directly with the button on the controller.

Navigation data

> Depending on the data volume, a data update may take several hours.
> Update data while driving to reduce the drain on the battery.
> Only the main functions of the navigation system are available during updating.
The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption. > You can inquire as to the status of the
update. > The data are stored in the vehicle. > After the update, the system restarts. > The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is completed.
Information about navigation data
1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version":
Information about the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the navigation DVD and change the DVD if needed.

General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your BMW center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Removing navigation DVD

Navigation system Navigation

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Querying status

Press the button.

2. "Navigation update"

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

149

Navigation Destination entry
Destination entry

Press the button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

ProCarManuals.com

General information
In entering your destination you can select from the following options: > Entering a destination manually, see below > Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 152 > Last destinations, refer to page 153 > Special destinations, refer to page 153 > Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 155 > Selecting home address, refer to page 153 > Destination entry via voice, refer to
page 156 > Destination entry via BMW Assist, refer to
page 155 You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.
Entering a destination manually
To make it easier to enter town/city names and street names, the system assists you with automatic name completion and entry comparison, refer to page 159. This makes it possible to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored town/city names and street names can be accessed quickly.

The system also supports you with the following features: > If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or city. > You can skip the entry of state/province and town/city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "State/Province" or displayed coun-
try.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Destination entry Navigation

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is reduced in steps with each entry.

To delete letters:

> To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select then press the controller.

, and

> To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller for an extended period.

To enter spaces:

> Select the

symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

3. Move the controller to the right.

4. Select the name of the town/city from the list.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.

2. Highlight the town/city.

3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.
2. Select the symbol. 3. Select the digits. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Select an entry.

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight street. 3. Select the street.
Alternative: entering street and house number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street. 2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the digits. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
No such street at the destination
The desired street is not in the entered town/ city because it belongs to another district of the town/city. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" displayed country.
All streets of the entered country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street. 2. Enter the street and cross-street the same
way you entered the town/city.
After you enter the street, you can also enter the cross street or the house number. If there are several streets with the same name:

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight street. 9. Select the street.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

151

Navigation Destination entry

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination
1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation", refer to page 157. > Setting "Route preference", refer to
page 159. > Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
to page 153.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 228.

Storing a destination in the address book
Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

ProCarManuals.com

Selecting a destination from the address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 218.

6. Select an existing contact, if available. 7. "Business address" or "Home address" 8. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish. 9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".

3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired, using the "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home address"

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Destination entry Navigation

4. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"

Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using the home address as a destination
The home address must be created. Specifying a home address, refer to page 228.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"

3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations

General information
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information about certain special destinations may have changed; for example, filling stations may not be in operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

153

Navigation Destination entry

ProCarManuals.com

Opening the search for special destinations
1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.
Searching online
1. "GoogleTM Local Search" 2. Select the special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"
Special destination location
As you input the search destination, you can select from among various options. > "At current location" > "At destination" > "At different location" > "Along route"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select category. 6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details. 7. "Keyword" 8. Enter keyword. A list of the special destinations is displayed. 9. Select the special destination. Details are displayed. If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired. 10. Select the symbol. 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 180. "Start search": without entering a search term, the search is repeated with the last stored search term.
Category search
1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select category. 6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details. 7. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is displayed. 8. Select the special destination. Details are displayed. If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired. 9. Select the symbol. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 180.
Displaying special destinations
List of special destinations: the special destinations are displayed in order of their distance and are displayed with a direction arrow pointing toward the destination.

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Destination entry Navigation

ProCarManuals.com

With the Professional navigation system: In the Split screen, special destinations from the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

The current position of the vehicle is displayed on the map.
3. "Interactive map"

Destination entry via BMW Assist
A connection to the BMW Concierge service is established, refer to page 229. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Open "Options". 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the map
To display symbols of the special destinations in the map: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest"

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.
5. Press the controller to display additional menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

5. Select the settings.

Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it displays one of the following pieces of information: > A street name in the vicinity. > The district. > The coordinates of the destination.

Destination entry via map
If you only know the location of a destination or street, then you can enter the destination with the aid of the map.

Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

155

Navigation Destination entry

ProCarManuals.com

> Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
> "Exit interactive map": Go back to the map view.
> "View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"
> "Display destination": the section of the map around the destination is displayed.
> "Display current location": The section of the map around the current position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to page 153.
Destination entry via voice
General information
For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 25. > During the destination entry by voice, you
can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary. > Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}
Saying the entries
> With the Professional navigation system: City/town, street, and house number can be entered with a single command.

> Countries, towns and cities, streets and intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the system language, refer to page 94. Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the area is different from the system language.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exaggerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.
> The methods of entry depend on the navigation data in use and on the country and language settings.
Entering an address in a command
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. {Enter address}
3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address aloud in the suggested
order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g. the town/city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city name can be spoken as a complete word or spelled. With the destination entry menu displayed: 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {City} or {Spell city}.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least the first three letters.

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Destination entry Navigation

ProCarManuals.com

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cities may be suggested. 5. Select a location:
> To select a recommended town/city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {New entry}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry ...} > To spell an entry: {Spell city} 6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system. If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled in a separate list and are displayed as one town/ city followed by three dots. 1. Select an entry:
{Yes} or {Entry ...} e.g. entry 2.
2. Select the desired town/city. The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same manner as the town/city.
Entering a house number
Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be entered:
1. {House number} 2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted
by the system.
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance} Destination guidance starts immediately.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned using intermediate destinations. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip. 1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is inserted into the destination list and highlighted. 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is at the desired place in the list. 6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations, highlight the first destination and say "Start guidance"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

157

Navigation Destination entry

ProCarManuals.com

For example if the second destination is highlighted at the start of route guidance, then the first destination is skipped over. The symbol indicates the active intermediate destination.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you to store new trips. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter a name. 4. "OK" The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.
Selecting a stored trip
1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select the desired trip. 4. "Start guidance"
Trips, changing
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in reverse order in the list. 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.
> "Edit destination" > "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the
intermediate destination within the list. > "Delete dest. in the trip" > "Go to next dest. in the trip" Some options are not possible for some trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select the desired trip. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Selecting last trip
1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Destination guidance Navigation
Destination guidance

ProCarManuals.com

Route criteria

General information
> You can influence the calculated route by selecting certain trip criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during destination entry and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data and are taken into account in route planning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from personal experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 165.

Changing route criteria

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

"Route preference"

4. Selecting a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimized route through a combination of the least possible distance and stretches of road that allow rapid driving.

> "ECO PRO route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route.

> "Short route": short distance without taking time into account.

> "Alternative routes": are suggested, where possible, during active route guidance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

159

Navigation Destination guidance

The individual suggestions are labeled in color.

> Traffic bulletins. > Distance to the next change of direction. > Street name of the next change of direction.

ProCarManuals.com

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route. > "Avoid highways": highways are avoided where possible. > "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided where possible. > "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible.
The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.
Route
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, various views of the route are available during route guidance: > Arrow display on the Control Display. > List of route segments. > Map view, refer to page 162.

Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of multi-lane roads are each marked with a triangle. > Filled triangle: optimum lane. > Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It
can, however, also be possible to briefly make additional lane changes.
Displaying the list of route segments
If the route guidance has been started, then you can display a list of route segments. The distance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are displayed for each segment of the route. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Highlight the route segment. The route segment is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During route guidance, prompt the navigation system to bypass certain route segments. In doing so, you will specify how many kilometers to travel before returning to the original route. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for"

Arrow display
The following information is displayed during route guidance: > Large arrow: current direction of travel. > Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction. > Intersection view. > Lane information.

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Destination guidance Navigation

4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mileage.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be bypassed: 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for" 4. "Remove blocking"

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

"Voice instructions"

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 23.

Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and filling stations along the route are displayed.
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information about certain special destinations may have changed; for example, filling stations may not be in operation.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel" A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the selected filling station is started.
"Add as another destination": the filling station is incorporated into the route.

Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued. 1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary. 2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

161

Navigation Destination guidance

Map view
Displaying the map view
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"
Overview

> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not relate to the planned route or direction of travel.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 163.
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned route is displayed on the map.

ProCarManuals.com

1 Toolbar 2 Route segment with traffic obstruction 3 Road sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status box 7 Lower status box
Lines on the map
Streets and roads are depicted with different colors and lines according to their classification. Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry connections. National borders are depicted with thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify route segments with traffic obstructions, depending on map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the obstruction. Road signs classify the obstructions. > Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.

Status boxes
Show/hide: press the controller.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time, and distance from destination.

Toolbar

The following functions are available directly in the map view:

Symbol

Function

Starting/stopping destination guidance

Switching voice instructions on/ off

Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives

Special destinations

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Map view settings

Changing scale

Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Destination guidance Navigation

Changing scale
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale. The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Settings" Set the optimized map view. > "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: Settings are not taken into account. > "Satellite images" Depending on the availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed in scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km. > "Perspective view in 3D" Displays a three-dimensional view. Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D. > "Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for the Split screen display
The map view for the Split screen can be selected separately from the main screen. 1. Open "Options". 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the Split screen content is selected.

4. Select "Split screen content" or scale. 5. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display" > "Map facing north" > "Map direction of travel" > "Map view with perspective" > "Position" > "Exit ramp view" > "Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: switch to the Split screen and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins
Overview
> You can display the traffic bulletins from radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service. Bulletins about traffic obstructions and hazards are continuously updated.
> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on the map.
> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list. The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the calculated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the EndUser is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

163

Navigation Destination guidance

ProCarManuals.com

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or

BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Accessing traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position. 4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": Display additional information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if desired.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. Symbols or special destinations are no longer displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Destination guidance Navigation

Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the location of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are displayed.

> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are always shown.
> For your personal safety, it is not possible to hide traffic bulletins that announce a potential hazard.

Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruction's length, direction and impact are displayed on the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. > Red: traffic congestion > Orange: stop-and-go traffic > Yellow: heavy traffic > Green: clear roads > Gray: general traffic information, e.g. con-
struction zone The bulletins displayed depend in the respective traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the map. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired categories.

Route guidance with traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic bulletin reception switched on, semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traffic bulletins during route guidance. A message is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. The message displays the traffic bulletin and in the event of a traffic obstruction, suggests an alternate route if possible. The difference in distance and time between the original route and the alternate route are also displayed.
Taking an alternate route:
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the roadway, a message is displayed without a possible alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"

ProCarManuals.com

Traffic bulletins from the selected categories are displayed on the map.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

165

Navigation Destination guidance
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. > The system does not point out traffic
obstructions along the original route. > Traffic bulletins will continue to be dis-
played on the map. > Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction. > Certain hazards are displayed regardless of the setting. To activate dynamic route guidance: 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"

ProCarManuals.com

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

What to do if ...

What to do if ... Navigation

> Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance? The area has not been fully recorded yet, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.

What to do if...
> The current position cannot be displayed? The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Reception is generally available when you are in the open.
> The destination guidance does not accept a destination without a street name? A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a destination? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
> The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

167

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Entertainment On/off and tone
On/off and tone

Buttons near the CD/DVD player

ProCarManuals.com

General information
The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments: > Radio > CD/DVD player > CD changer > Video > External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled using the: > Buttons near the CD/DVD player > iDrive > Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11 > Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 23 > Voice activation system

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.

> Turn: adjusting the volume

2 Eject the CD/DVD

3 CD/DVD drive

4 FM/AM: change the radio station waveband

5 MODE: change the audio and video sources

Station scan/track search

> Change the radio station

> Select the track for the CD/DVD player, CD changer and certain multimedia devices

Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or off: Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition was switched off. For sound output, switch the unit back on.

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

On/off and tone Entertainment

Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained. You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

3. Select the desired tone setting.

Setting tone controls
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Treble": treble adjustment. > "Bass": bass adjustment. > "Balance": left/right volume distribution > "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
You can set individual sound frequency ranges. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.

Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone"

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

171

Entertainment On/off and tone
Multi-channel playback, surround
You can choose between stereo and multichannel playback, surround. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "L7 Surround"

Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.

ProCarManuals.com

When surround is activated, multi-channel playback is simulated when playing an audio track in stereo.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.
Volume
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted depending on the speed
> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g. for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during a phone conversation.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default setting. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Radio

Radio Entertainment

1. "Radio"

General information
Your radio is designed for reception of the following stations: > FM and AM > HD Radio > Satellite radio

2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

Selecting a station

ProCarManuals.com

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations

Turn the controller and press it

press the direction

button for the corresponding

press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

173

Entertainment Radio

4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.

4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Via programmable memory keys

You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.

1. Select a station.

...

button.

Press and hold the desired

ProCarManuals.com

Renaming a radio station
An FM station with changing station names can be renamed. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait until the desired name appears. The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations.

RDS Radio Data System
In the FM waveband, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"

Storing stations

Via iDrive
1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Radio Entertainment

ProCarManuals.com

HD RadioTM reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital signals.
License conditions
HD RadioTM technology is manufactured under U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity Digital Corp. HD RadioTM and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.
When setting a station that has a digital signal, it may take several seconds before the station plays in HD quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Selecting a station
1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.
Storing stations
The station currently selected is stored. 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. "Store station"

Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist. 1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. The station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use. You can also store the stations on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

175

Entertainment Satellite radio
Satellite radio

Activating channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels. 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"

General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages. Packages must be activated by telephone.

ProCarManuals.com

Navigation bar

Symbol

Function Changing list view Selecting category Entering channel directly Time shift Accessing favorites, selecting the My Favorites category Managing favorites Traffic Jump

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category.
5. Select desired channel. The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the channels activated.

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and deactivating channels. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

This telephone number can also be used to deactivate the channels.

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Deactivating channels
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription"

Satellite radio Entertainment

Via the button in the area of the CD/DVD player

Press the

button for the corresponding

direction.

The next channel is selected.

Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.

The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed. 5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory. 4. Select desired channel.

Storing channel
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or a desired category. 4. Select desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. You can also store the channels on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

177

Entertainment Satellite radio

Changing list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information about the channel is displayed.

Symbol

Function Channel name Artist Track

Selecting category
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

ProCarManuals.com

Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel currently being listened to is temporarily stored in a cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played back at a different time from the live broadcast. If the cache memory is full, then the older tracks are recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if a new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

> The red arrow indicates the current playback position.
> The time difference from the live broadcast is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
> For live transmissions: "live".

Time shift menu

Symbol

Function Go to live broadcast Playback/pause Next track Previous track Fast forward Reverse Automatic time shift deactivated/ activated

Automatic time shift
When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of:
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. > Activation of the voice activation system. > Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay.

Activating
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift"

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Satellite radio Entertainment

Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game, league, and team.

Accessing favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, the message "Favorite alert!" appears for approx. 20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the alert message is being displayed.

Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favorites. The channel information must be available. 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory. 4. Select desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select artist, track, or game.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list. 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"

The displayed favorite will be played. If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All of the favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated globally and individually. 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

5. Select the desired league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.

Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

179

Entertainment Satellite radio

Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected region are broadcast at intervals of a few minutes.
Selecting region
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes
> Under some circumstances, reception may not be possible, e.g. under certain environmental or topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages or near trees, mountains, or other powerful sources of radio interference.

ProCarManuals.com

Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:" As soon as information about the selected region becomes available, it is broadcast. A new panel appears in the display. Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol

Meaning
Information will be broadcast soon.
Information is currently being broadcast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update of the names and positions of the channels. The update occurs automatically and can take several minutes.

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

CD/DVD player and CD changer Entertainment
CD/DVD player and CD changer

CD changer > CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Starting playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to page 185. To start playback when a CD/DVD is already in the player or changer: 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

ProCarManuals.com

Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A

Ejecting a CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

Symbol

Meaning CD/DVD player CD changer

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

181

Entertainment CD/DVD player and CD changer

Audio playback

5. Select a track and press the controller.

Selecting the track using the button

Press the

button for the appropriate

direction as often as necessary until the desired

track is reached.

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

ProCarManuals.com

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

> Artist > Album title > Number of tracks on the CD/DVD > Track file name
Random sequence playback, Random
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played once in random sequence. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD. 4. Open "Options".

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

CD/DVD player and CD changer Entertainment

5. "Random"

Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the automatic transmission is in the park position.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all the tracks in the selected directory are played in random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

DVD video

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content.

"DVD menu"

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the sponding direction.

button for the corre-

Automatic replay
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

Video playback

Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Code 1 2
3 4
5 6 0

Region USA, Canada Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa Southeast Asia Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand Northwest Asia, North Africa China All regions

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a CD/DVD with video content. 4. "Select track" 5. Select the desired track. The CD/DVD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu: 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

183

Entertainment CD/DVD player and CD changer

The Video menu is displayed:

3. "Audio/language"

Symbol

Function Open the DVD menu Starting playback Pause Stop Next chapter/next track Previous chapter/previous track Fast forward Reverse

ProCarManuals.com

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu

1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the Video menu.

"DVD menu"

The DVD menu is displayed. The display

depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: move and press the controller.

> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

4. Select the desired language. The languages that are available depend on the DVD.
Subtitles
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".

DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; also refer to the information on your DVD.
Language
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings"

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

CD/DVD player and CD changer Entertainment

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

Camera angle
The camera angle depends on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed, and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen. 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"

Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.
CD changer
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo area.
Coupe

ProCarManuals.com

Selecting track
DVD video: 1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD: 1. "Select track" 2. Select the desired track.

Convertible

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

185

Entertainment CD/DVD player and CD changer

Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

Inserting the CD magazine

ProCarManuals.com

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1. 2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected. Push the magazine back in after at least 2 seconds have passed so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area. Inserting CDs: Insert one CD per compartment with the labeled side up. Removing CDs: Pull out the desired compartment and take out the CD.

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus; otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

CD/DVD player and CD changer Entertainment

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this may be due to one of the following reasons.

DTS Digital SurroundTM
Manufactured under license of US patent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other patents granted and pending in both the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered U.S. patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision, media with this protection may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

187

Entertainment Music collection
Music collection

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Storing music
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/ DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC formats. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.
Regularly back up the music data; otherwise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may prac-

tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132, 6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and 6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending patents. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: 6.304.523. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD player. 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player. 5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed. The tracks are stored and played back in sequence from the music collection. Observe the following during the storage process: Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player; otherwise, the storage process will be interrupted.

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Music collection Entertainment

You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD can also be called up, if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player. 4. "Continue storing" The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the beginning of the track at which storing was interrupted.

Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be connected to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with multiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.
> File systems: popular file systems for USB devices are supported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.
Music from a USB device can be stored only via the USB interface in the glove compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"

Album information
During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.
To update the database, contact your service center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

189

Entertainment Music collection

ProCarManuals.com

Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.

7. "Start play" The list of tracks is automatically repeated.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice
For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 25. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Music search} 3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select additional categories if desired. To select a track directly: {Title ...} Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"

5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input
or
> select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Music collection Entertainment

Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

4. "Random"

Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

Symbol

Format Audio CD Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later. An album cannot be renamed while a track from that album is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random sequence playback, Random
All tracks of the selection are played back in random order. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options".

6. Select the letters individually.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

191

Entertainment Music collection

Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"

1. Start the engine. 2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment, refer to page 126. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"

Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

7. "Backup music on USB"

ProCarManuals.com

Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music collection. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a USB medium. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

Restoring the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the music collection existing in the vehicle is replaced.< 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

Music collection Entertainment

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

193

Entertainment External devices
External devices

ProCarManuals.com

Overview
Symbol Meaning AUX-In connection USB audio interface Mobile phone audio interface Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g. MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and volume settings on the audio device. Tone may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.

Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest. Connect the headphone connection or line-out connection of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and using the audio device, select a track.
2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices" if applicable 4. "AUX front" Sound is output over the vehicle speakers
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting volume
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" if applicable 3. "AUX front"

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

4. "Volume"

Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible: > MP3 > WMA > WAV (PCM) > AAC, M4A > Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and then press the controller.

Connection via the USB audio interface.
Lift up the center armrest.

ProCarManuals.com

USB audio interface/mobile phone audio interface

Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e. g. MP3 player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter, when equipped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may only be possible when no device is connected to the AUX-IN port.
Because of the large number of audio devices available on the market, an operation via the vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio device/mobile phone. Ask your BMW center for suitable audio devices/mobile phones.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface 2. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device from mechanical damage, connect them with a flexible adapter cable. Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.
After initial connection
Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music style and the playlists are imported into the vehicle. It can take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

195

Entertainment External devices

During transmission, the tracks can be accessed via the file directory.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of existing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.

Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed.
> Select the desired entry from the list.

ProCarManuals.com

Playback begins with the first track. The CD cover that belongs to the track appears on the Control Display, possibly after a few seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via: > Playback lists > Information: music style, artist; if applicable,
composer, album, track. > Additionally for USB devices: file directory;
if applicable, composer. Track titles are displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

6. Select additional categories if desired. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

External devices Entertainment

Current playback
List of tracks currently being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random sequence. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the

button.

Video playback

Overview
Video playback possible via snap-in adapter. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

Playback

For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the automatic transmission is in the park position.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

"Video"

5. Select the directory, if necessary.

To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

6. Select the desired video file to begin playback.

Video menu

Symbol

Format
Next video file Previous video file It may be necessary to click the symbol twice in order to play the previous video file.

Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. For this reason, do not connect the device to a charging socket in the vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possible to ensure proper playback.
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to recharge external devices.

Bluetooth audio
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music files from external devices, e.g. audio devices or mobile phones. Using a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 195.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

197

Entertainment External devices

> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, change the volume setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

ProCarManuals.com

Requirements
> Suitable device. For information, go to www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 205, and in the device.
> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 205.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the device.
> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing.

5. To perform other operations on the device, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device's display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device's display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead to endangerment of passengers or other road users.< 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"

8. Select desired functions with which the device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected.
symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if..., refer to page 200.

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

External devices Entertainment

Connecting a particular device
A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connection is not possible if a data exchange is currently taking place via a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.
Prerequisite
If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devices. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable 4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. Activate "Audio". 8. "OK"

Playback
General information
> The display of track information depends on the device.
> Operation via the device or iDrive are both possible.
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is taking place with a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices" 4. Select the symbol.

Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable 4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.

5. Select the desired title from the list.
Playback menu
Depending on the device, all functions may not be available.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

Symbol

Function Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol. Previous track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

199

Entertainment External devices

ProCarManuals.com

Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. Select the desired device from the list of
connected devices. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. "Audio" 7. "OK" With a mobile phone, only the audio connection is disconnected. All other connections remain active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable 4. Highlight the device to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information about suitable devices is available at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 204. > Device not supported by vehicle.
If necessary, perform a software update, refer to page 201. > Device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary, delete the connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.
Is the device no longer responding? Switch the device off and back on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
> No music can be played.
Start the program for playing music files on the device and if necessary, select a track via the device.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.
> Music files only play quietly.
Adjust volume settings on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by the press of a button or other messages on the device.
Switch off key tones and other acoustic signal on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic report and does not automatically continue.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.
> Playback is not possible when the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the same time via the extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone.
Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g. the audio connection, refer to page 200, and start playback again.

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

External devices Entertainment

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function, please contact Customer Relations or your BMW center.

5. "Update software"

Software update
The vehicle supports various external devices, depending on the software it is currently using. A software update can enable the vehicle to support, for example, new mobile phones or new external devices.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date instructions are available on the web page www.bmwusa.com/update.

6. "USB" if applicable 7. "Start update" 8. "OK" All of the listed software updates are installed.

Displaying current version
The currently installed software is displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Show current version" Select the desired version to display additional information.
Updating software by USB
The software update can only be performed when stopped. 1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage device. 2. Connect the USB data storage device to the USB interface of the USB audio interface in the center armrest. It is not possible to perform the update using the USB interface in the glove compartment. 3. "Settings" 4. "Software update"

Restoring to previous version
If necessary, it is possible to restore the system to the software version prior to the last software update. The restoring to the previous version can only be performed when stopped. 1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. Select "OK" twice. All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
BMW Assist, Office functions, and connected devices may be temporarily unavailable during a software update or while restoring to the previous version. Wait a few minutes until the functions are available once more.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

201

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Communications
This chapter describes how to use the telephone, BMW Assist and BMW TeleServices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Communications Telephone
Telephone

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g. audio players, can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is switched on, these devices are automatically detected as soon as they are present in the vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, by the buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a telephone and/or as an audio source, external devices can be used via the vehicle. The telephone functions will be described below. Operation of audio functions, refer to page 197.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
It may be necessary for some functions to be activated by the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the handsfree system instead. Otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter makes it possible: > Accommodate the mobile phone. > Recharge its battery. > Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection and constant sound quality.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information about which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth.
Displaying vehicle identification number and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation requires the vehicle identification number and software part number. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information" With a certain software version, these suitable mobile phones support the vehicle functions described below. With other mobile phones or software versions, malfunctions may occur.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle should not be operated via the mobile phone keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update, refer to page 201.

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Telephone Communications

Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, follow the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing/unpairing mobile phone

General information
The following functions are available: > Using a mobile phone as a telephone. > Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone. > Using the mobile phone as an audio source. > Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 197.
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 204. > Mobile phone operational. > Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 207, and in the mobile phone. > Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the mobile phone. > Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 205. > A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing. > Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

Additional functions
Auxiliary phone
A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary phone. Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be accepted, refer to page 209. Missed calls to the auxiliary phone are shown in the Control Display.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and e-mails are imported from the mobile phone into the vehicle.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating additional functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate them before pairing. For information on suitable mobile phones that support these functions, refer to page 204. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth®"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

205

Communications Telephone

5. Select the desired additional function: > "Additional telephone" > "Office" > "Bluetooth® audio"
If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot be assigned to a phone.

6. Enter the passkey and confirm.

Pairing and connecting a device
Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead to endangerment of passengers or other road users.< 1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of devices.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols during the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.

ProCarManuals.com

4. To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

Symbol Function Telephone
Auxiliary phone
Audio source
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle simultaneously. Three devices can be connected to the vehicle simultaneously. If the pairing was not successful: what to do if..., refer to page 208.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
> The phone book entries of the telephone that are stored on the SIM card or the mobile phone are imported into the vehicle once the device is detected, depending on the mobile phone.

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Telephone Communications

> Four devices can be paired. > Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Connecting a particular device
If more than one device is detected by the vehicle, the device at the top of the list is connected. Another detected device may be connected to the vehicle. A different device can be connected by selecting it. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed. 3. Select the device to be connected.

6. Select the desired functions. At least one function must be selected. > "Telephone" > "Additional telephone" > "Audio"
7. "OK" If a device is assigned a function, this may deactivate the function in an already connected device and cause the other device to be unpaired.

The functions assigned before the unpairing of the device are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If a device is already connected, then these functions are deactivated if necessary.
Configuring devices
Additional functions can be activated or deactivated in paired and connected devices. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" 3. Highlight the device to be configured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone"

Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are connected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped between the two devices. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing device
1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed. 3. Highlight the device to be unpaired. 4. Open "Options".

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

207

Communications Telephone

ProCarManuals.com

5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 204. The mobile phone could not be paired or connected. > Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and in the mobile phone. > Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive. > Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure. > Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the connections with other devices on the mobile phone. > Is the audio connection activated? Deactivate the audio connection. > Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable. > Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject your mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.
Telephone functions not possible.
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary phone and is the auxiliary phone function deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of them are displayed, or they are displayed incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not yet completed.
> In some cases, only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card will be transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is too great, e.g. due to additionally stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or auxiliary phone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possible to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the vicinity of the center console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker separately.

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Telephone Communications

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function, please check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth for further notes or contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.
Operation
Adjusting volume

Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, then the name and number of the contact are displayed; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone number, then only the name of the caller is displayed.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the number is displayed if it is transmitted by the network.
An incoming call to the auxiliary phone is automatically rejected if a call with the phone is currently active.

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the mobile phone and the volume of the person on the phone with you. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to adjust the volumes.
Adjustments are only possible during a call and must be carried out separately for each phone. When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. To select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.

Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject" The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

209

Communications Telephone

Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel or 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "End call"

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by voice. Only numbers can be spoken aloud.
Association of letters/numbers

Letter ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ

Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ProCarManuals.com

Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
When entering phone numbers, you can switch between entering letters and numbers. Service numbers can be entered more easily, e.g. 1-888-BMW-CARD. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually.

Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls or to connect two calls to establish a conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to another party
This function may have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone may need to be adjusted for this. When a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

4. Switch to letters if necessary. Select the symbol. Select the letters individually.
5. Select the symbol. Select the symbol to switch to numbers.

Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

The existing call is put on hold.

Telephone Communications

1. Establish two calls.

"Conference call"

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list. "Return"
The call on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted. The call on hold is identified with: "on hold...".
"Swap calls" The phone switches to the call on hold.

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone
The microphone can be muted in active calls. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute"

Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.

The muted microphone is automatically activated: > If a new call is made. > When switching between callers on hold.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

211

Communications Telephone

ProCarManuals.com

Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely access an answering machine. This requires the DTMF code. 1. "Telephone" 2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number" 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter a DTMF code.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the telephone and shows all contacts for which a phone number is entered. The entries can be selected to make a call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 218.
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning Contact with a stored phone number. Contact with more than one stored phone number. Call not possible. The mobile phone has no reception or network or a Service Request is currently active.

Contacts with a stored phone number: select the desired contact. The connection is established. Contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the desired contact and then select the phone number. The connection is established.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle. 1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed. The last 20 phone numbers dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and phone number, if necessary.

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Telephone Communications

The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone. 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact". 4. Select contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other". 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the mobile phone is transferred into the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that were received in the vehicle are displayed. The last 20 calls received are displayed. The sorting and displaying of phone numbers depends on the mobile phone. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list
Select an entry. The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone. 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact". 4. Select contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other". 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can be continued using the mobile phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued using the hands-free system if the ignition is switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the call is automatically switched to hands-free mode. If the switch does not occur automatically, then follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

213

Communications Telephone

From hands-free system to mobile phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can also be continued using the mobile phone if so desired, depending on the mobile phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

ProCarManuals.com

Operation by voice
With voice activation system: Operation, refer to page 25.
Without voice activation system: Depending upon the equipment, the mobile phone can be voice-operated as described below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual applies only to this type of voice activation.

The concept
> The mobile phone can be operated without removing your hand from the steering wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is supported by means of announcements or questions.
> {...}indicates commands for voice activation.

Voice commands

Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Say the command.

Finishing voice input

Press the or

button on the steering wheel

{Cancel}.

Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word.
{Help}. Possible commands are read aloud. Digits from zero to nine are recognized. Each digit can be spoken individually or combined into a sequence to accelerate the entry process.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Example: dialing phone numbers
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. {Dial number}
The system replies: {{Please say the number}}. 3. For example: {123 456 7890} The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Continue ?}} 4. {Dial} The system replies: {{Dialing number}}
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}. 2. Say the phone number. 3. {Dial}. The connection to the desired subscriber is established.
Correcting phone number
Digit sequences can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits.
{Correct number}.

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Telephone Communications

ProCarManuals.com

The command can be repeated as often as necessary.
Deleting phone number
{Delete}. All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

To listen to and select the entries
1. {Read phonebook}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.
2. Say {Dial number} when the desired entry is read.

Redialing
{Redial}.
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Store the entry
1. {Save name}. 2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
speaking duration of about 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system. 4. {Save}.
Delete the entry
1. {Delete name}. 2. Say the name when prompted. 3. Confirm request: {Yes}
Delete all entries
1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.
2. Confirm request: {Yes} 3. Confirm request again: {Yes}

Select an entry
1. {Dial name}. 2. Say the name when prompted. 3. Confirm request: {Yes}
Adjusting volume
Turn knob during announcement. > The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. > The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an emergency call. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 276, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis and speed.
> Always say the commands in the language of the system. The language of the voice activation of the mobile phone is preset and cannot be changed via the Control Display.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof, and convertible top closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

215

Communications Telephone

Snap-in adapter

Inserting mobile phone

General information
Detailed information on snap-in adapters that compatibly support mobile phone functions can be found at your BMW center.

Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer be carried out. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, follow the operating instructions of the mobile phone.
Installation location
In the center armrest.

1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to remove the protective cap of the antenna connector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connections and press down until it engages.

Inserting snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.

Removing mobile phone

ProCarManuals.com

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until it clicks into place.

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Office

Office Communications

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages and mobile phone e-mails can be displayed using the Control Display if the mobile phone compatibly supports these functions and the required Bluetooth radio standards. For information about which mobile phones and functions support the functions of Office, go to www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number of compatible mobile phones are available for Office. Contents are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped. Only read access to the mobile phone is possible.
Do not use Office while driving. Make entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 90, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone in order, for example, to correctly display appointments.
> Office is activated, refer to page 205.
Updating
Every time that the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated separately. 1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"
Data from the mobile phone are again transferred to the vehicle.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as upcoming appointments are displayed. 1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Selecting the desired entry to display
details.

Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, the data access to the mobile phone must be confirmed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

217

Communications Office

Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The contacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

Displaying contacts
1. "Office" 2. "Contacts"

3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.

ProCarManuals.com

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol
No symbol

Storage location
In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone

Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select phone number.
The connection is established.

Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone, the address must be compared with the navigation data stored in the vehicle. In this case: Correct the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Office Communications

ProCarManuals.com

If the address is corrected and stored, then a copy is established in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and one Internet address. 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "New contact"

Contact types
Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned various contact types.

Symbol

Meaning Private phone number Business phone number Mobile phone number Other phone number Private address Business address

Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts. 1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

5. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.
7. Enter text and assign a contact type.
8. When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the navigation data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders. 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name" Depending on how the contacts are stored in your mobile phone, the sorting of names can differ from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The mobile phone must support this function. 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth®" 5. "Show images"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

219

Communications Office

ProCarManuals.com

The display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted. 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. "Options" 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages and emails from the mobile phone depends on whether the mobile phone supports transmission into the vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider or the function may have to be separately activated. After a mobile phone is paired for the first time, the transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped. Messages from the auxiliary phone are not transmitted. To display various messages: > Text messages. > Messages from My info. > Messages from the BMW Concierge ser-
vice. > Messages from BMW Info. > Emails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office" 2. "Messages"

Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message. Read message. Unread message.

Symbol

Message type Text message
My Info
Message from the Concierge service, refer to page 229 Messages from BMW Info, refer to page 222 E-mail from mobile phone

Filtering message lists
A message list can be filtered if there is more than one message type.
1. "Filter:"

2. Select the message type.
> "All" All messages are displayed.
> "E-mail" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.
> "Services messages" Only messages from the BMW Concierge service, My Info, and BMW Info are displayed.
> "Text message" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Office Communications

Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service, My Info, BMW Info, and BMW Online can be deleted. To delete a message: 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. Open "Options". 5. Open "Delete message". To delete all messages: 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all messages"
Text message
Calling a text message sender
1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.
Saving sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 224.
Reading text messages aloud
Having text messages read aloud, refer to page 225.

My Info

Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a message is selected.

Symbol

Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

Messages from the Concierge service

Saving an address
1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a message is selected.

Symbol

Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

221

Communications Office

Symbol

Function
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.
"Further information"
Displaying additional information.

BMW Info

General information
Messages from BMW about technical campaigns and news from BMW.

Displaying messages

ProCarManuals.com

Select the desired message.

The following functions are available:

Symbol

Function
"Further information"
Detailed information about a message is displayed. This does not incur any costs.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

E-mail

Displaying e-mail
1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message.

Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts, then the contact is displayed. Select contact to display details.
If the e-mail address is not stored in the contacts, then it may be that only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 224.

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Office Communications

Deactivating entire display
When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it is completely transferred to the vehicle. This may result in charges. 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading e-mail
Reading e-mail, see page 225.
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed. 1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are displayed.
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.

Displaying appointment

1. Select the desired appointment.

2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the

symbol.

Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 224.

Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to page 225.

Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed within the next 90 days. 1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.

ProCarManuals.com

2. Select desired day or date. > "Next day" > "Date:" > "Previous day" > "Today"

2. To select a sorting criterion: > "Priority (!)" > "Subject" > "Due date"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

223

Communications Office

ProCarManuals.com

Displaying task

1. Select the desired task.

2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the

symbol.

Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 224.

Reading a task aloud
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 225.

Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office" 2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.

Reading a note aloud
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 225.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders for imminent appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment has passed or a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed. 1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The associated appointment or task is displayed.
Using contact data
Overview
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected.
To display a contact or dial a phone number:
1. "Use contact data"

2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the

symbol.

Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 224.

2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed view of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly establish a connection.

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Office Communications

Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail
address. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading aloud
Text messages, emails, appointments, tasks, and notes can be read aloud. 1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note. 2. Select the symbol. While the message is being read aloud, you have the following options: > "Pause"
Interrupt the reading. Select again to resume the reading. > "Back to beginning" Read message again from the beginning. > Select the symbol. Skip back one paragraph. > Select the symbol. Skip over a paragraph. > To terminate the reading, move the controller toward the left.

What to do if...
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 204.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or emails from the mobile phone are not displayed?
The mobile phone is not suitable for the missing function or is not correctly connected.
The mobile phone has not been assigned the Office function.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxiliary phone.
The appointments are older than 20 days and are more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed or are more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of appointments, tasks, notes, and messages stored in the mobile phone, not all of them are displayed in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile phone are not being displayed at the correct time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set in the Control Display and in the mobile phone.
> Texts of entries are not displayed completely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

225

Communications Contacts
Contacts

4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

ProCarManuals.com

Note
In equipment packages without mobile phone preparation.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation.
New contact
1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

5. Entering text, refer to page 23. When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the navigation data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary 7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts. 1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts

3. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields".

General information
List of all contacts that are stored in the vehicle.

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Contacts Communications

Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts" 2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol No symbol

Storage location
In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone

Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders. 1. "My contacts" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported using Personal Profile, refer to page 30.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

3. Change the entries. 4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

227

Communications ConnectedDrive
ConnectedDrive

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides a number of different services. For example, the position data of the vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center when an Emergency Request is sent. Many BMW Assist services depend on the contract individually agreed upon. After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged into a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine its current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.

> The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. The service must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the SOS button, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Emergency Request: under certain conditions, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.
> Customer Relations: connection to Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleServices: the data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center, either automatically before a service due date or when you request a service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Response Center provides assistance if, for example, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to the police that your vehicle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can determine its position.

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ConnectedDrive Communications

ProCarManuals.com

> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information on route planning, the traffic situation and weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center, for example if the mobile phone is not available or discharged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.
TeleService:
General information
TeleServices supports communication with your BMW center. > Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In this way, the BMW center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment. > In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance. > The service varies by country. > Connection may incur charges. > Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated. > Wireless reception is available. > Ignition switched on.
Using TeleService
Generally, TeleService is activated in the vehicle. If TeleService is not activated, it is possible to establish a voice contact to the BMW Group Mobile Service. For additional uses or to deactivate the services, consult your BMW center or contact Customer Relations.

Concierge service
General information
The Concierge service of BMW Assist will inform you, for example, about upcoming events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you with their phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge service requires an additional activation by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service" A voice contact with the BMW Concierge service is established. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted as a message.
Messages
Information about messages, refer to page 220.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance can also be established using a Check Control message, refer to page 92.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

229

Communications ConnectedDrive

ProCarManuals.com

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance without BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection to BMW Roadside Assistance is established.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices
In a vehicle with TeleService, assistance is first offered through the TeleService Diagnosis and then if necessary, through the TeleService Help. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance" 3. "Start service"

After transmission of the data, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assistance.
BMW Online
Overview
You can use BMW Online to search the yellow pages. License conditions: This product contains NetFront Browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other countries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is current.
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"

BMW TeleService Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are critical to vehicle diagnosis. These data are automatically transmitted.

3. "OK" if necessary. The BMW Online start page is displayed.

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

ConnectedDrive Communications

Using BMW Online
To select and display content: > Turn the controller to highlight an element. > Press the controller to display an element.

The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection is established to Customer Relations.

Opening the start page
1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page
1. Open "Options". 2. "Reload"
Canceling
1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
Overview
Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"
Service Request
Overview
Inform your BMW center that you need to schedule a service appointment. The Teleservice data is transmitted during a Service Request. If possible, your BMW center will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request" 3. "Start service"

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

231

Communications ConnectedDrive

Automatic Service Request
The Teleservice data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. If possible, the center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.
Check when your BMW center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer
The status of the data transfer is displayed. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer"
Apps

ProCarManuals.com

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"
Service status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status" 3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manually updating BMW TeleServices, BMW Assist, and BMW Online.

Overview
Certain software applications of a suitable mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.
Requirements
> The mobile phone's operating system supports the use of apps.
> Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and are operational.
> Suitable mobile phone.
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Additional costs possibly incurred are not included in the price of apps.
Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications, and their installation can be found at www.bmw.com/ connectivity or at your BMW center.
Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted. For safety reasons, some software applications can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
To avoid malfunctions, only use software applications approved by BMW.<

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

ConnectedDrive Communications

Using apps
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter or the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
You can display information about the currently available software applications. 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"

> Certain versions of the mobile phone used and the software they use may not permit apps to be used at the same time as the Bluetooth hands-free system. If necessary, restart the software application on the mobile phone after completing a call.

Plugin
Selected functions of the mobile phone are displayed on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Use the controller to navigate in the displayed functions and select the desired category or track, for example.
Press the button to move one level up or back within the functions of the mobile phone.
Press the button twice to return back to the main menu.

Notes
> The range of apps that are displayed in the Control Display depends on the range of software applications installed on the mobile phone.
> The data transfer of the software applications from the mobile phone to the vehicle may take some time. Some software applications are dependent on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

233

ProCarManuals.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

ProCarManuals.com

Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Mobility Refueling
Refueling

Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler flap manually:
Coupe

ProCarManuals.com

Fuel filler flap
Opening

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo area.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler flap is released.

1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

236

ProCarManuals.com

Refueling Mobility

Convertible

Fuel specifications

1. Loosen the right-hand cargo area trim panel by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler flap is released.

Gasoline engine: required fuel
Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as metal-containing.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal-containing additives doing so can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter or other components.< Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85 ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
BMW recommends AKI 91.

Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/ 50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Gasoline with lower AKI
The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 328i/xDrive: 87
> 335i, 335i/xDrive: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10 ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 oxygen by weight, that is, 15 MTBE or 3 methanol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

237

Mobility Refueling
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

ProCarManuals.com

238

Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires Mobility

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

page 103, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 100.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.< For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle > Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or 160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

239

Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.< Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

ProCarManuals.com

240

Wheels and tires Mobility

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

ProCarManuals.com

Without Sport Package: 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M
With Sport Package: 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 V 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.2/32

2.5/36

2.4/35

2.7/39

2.2/32

2.5/36

2.7/39

2.9/42

2.5/36

3.0/44

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

2.2/32 2.6/38

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.2/32
2.2/32
-

2.6/38 2.7/39
2.4/35
2.7/39

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.9/42 2.9/42 2.9/42
2.7/39
-

3.4/49 3.4/49
3.0/44
3.2/46

241

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.5/36

2.7/39

3.0/44

3.2/46

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

242

Wheels and tires Mobility

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi

Tire size

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

2.2/32 2.6/38

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.2/32

2.3/33

2.7/39

2.3/33

2.5/36

2.6/38

2.9/42

2.7/39

3.0/44

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

243

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

ProCarManuals.com

With Sport Package: 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 V 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.2/32 2.6/38

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.2/32 2.6/38

2.8/41 3.3/48

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.8/41 3.3/48

2.2/32

2.8/41

2.3/33

2.9/42

2.3/33

2.7/39

2.6/38

3.2/46

2.7/39

2.8/41

3.0/44

3.2/46

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

244

ProCarManuals.com

Wheels and tires Mobility

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

Without Sport Package: 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M
With Sport Package: 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.6/38 3.1/45

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.6/38 3.1/45

2.2/32

2.6/38

2.4/35

2.8/41

2.2/32

2.6/38

2.7/39

3.1/45

2.2/32

2.4/35

2.7/39

2.8/41

2.6/38

3.1/45

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

2.2/32 2.3/33 2.2/32
2.2/32
2.2/32
-

2.7/39 2.8/41
2.4/35
2.7/39
2.7/39

2.6/38 2.9/42 2.6/38
2.8/41
2.5/36
-

3.1/45 3.4/49
3.0/44
3.3/48
3.0/44

245

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.6/38

2.8/41

3.1/45

3.3/48

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

246

Wheels and tires Mobility

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi

Tire size

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

ProCarManuals.com

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.7/39 3.1/45

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.7/39 3.1/45

2.2/32

2.7/39

2.4/35

2.7/39

2.4/35

2.6/38

2.7/39

2.9/42

2.4/35

2.7/39

3.1/45

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

2.2/32 2.3/33 2.2/32
2.4/35
2.4/35
-

2.7/39 2.8/41
2.4/35
2.7/39
2.7/39

2.7/39 2.9/42 2.7/39
2.9/42
2.7/39
-

3.1/45 3.4/49
3.0/44
3.3/48
2.9/42

247

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.7/39

2.9/42

3.1/45

3.3/48

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

248

Coupe: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Wheels and tires Mobility

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.2/32 2.7/39

2.6/38 3.1/45

2.4/35 2.9/42

3.0/44 3.4/49

2.3/33

2.9/42

2.8/41

3.4/49

2.3/33

2.6/38

2.8/41

3.1/45

2.7/39

2.9/42

3.2/46

3.4/49

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

249

Mobility Wheels and tires

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

ProCarManuals.com

Without Sport Package: 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 W RSC 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.7/39 3.2/46

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.7/39 3.2/46

2.2/32

2.5/36

2.9/42

2.4/35

2.6/38

2.9/42

3.1/45

2.4/35

2.9/42

2.7/39

3.2/46

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

250

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Wheels and tires Mobility

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

With Sport Package: 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 W RSC 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.5/36 3.0/44

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.8/41 3.3/48

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.9/42 3.4/49

2.2/32

2.8/41

2.5/36

3.1/45

2.4/35

2.9/42

3.4/49

2.4/35

2.6/38

2.9/42

3.1/45

2.7/39

2.9/42

3.2/46

3.4/49

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

251

Mobility Wheels and tires

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

ProCarManuals.com

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.7/39 3.2/46

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.7/39 3.2/46

2.2/32

2.5/36

2.9/42

2.4/35

2.6/38

2.9/42

3.1/45

2.4/35

2.9/42

2.7/39

3.2/46

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

2.3/33 2.4/35 2.2/32
2.4/35
2.4/35
-

2.8/41 2.9/42
2.5/36
2.9/42
2.9/42

2.7/39 2.9/42 2.8/41
2.9/42
2.6/38
-

3.2/46 3.4/49
3.1/45
3.4/49
3.1/45

252

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Wheels and tires Mobility

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

2.7/39

2.9/42

3.2/46

3.4/49

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

253

Mobility Wheels and tires

Convertible: inflation pressures 335is

Tire size
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

2.3/33 2.8/41

2.7/39 3.2/46

2.4/35 2.9/42

2.9/42 3.4/49

2.4/35

2.9/42

3.4/49

2.4/35

2.6/38

2.9/42

3.1/45

2.7/39

2.9/42

3.2/46

3.4/49

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

ProCarManuals.com

254

ProCarManuals.com

Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

e.g.

225/45 R 17 91 V

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:

e.g.

DOT xxxx xxx 1011

Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 1011 means that the tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2011.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<

255

Mobility Wheels and tires

ProCarManuals.com

Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 257.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with lowprofile tires. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

256

Wheels and tires Mobility

ProCarManuals.com

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire dealer. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replacement after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires. The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT... 3010 means that the tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2010.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only by your BMW center or by a tire dealer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 102. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands

Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

257

Mobility Wheels and tires

When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Run-flat tires

ProCarManuals.com

Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for driving on winter roads or at temperatures below +457/ +76. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of coldweather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 101.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 98.<

258

Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment

not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Important parts of the engine compartment

ProCarManuals.com

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 263
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system, refer to page 72
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 278
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

259

Mobility Engine compartment

Hood
Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. If you are not familiar with the regulations to be followed, have the necessary work on the vehicle carried out only by your BMW center; if this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Closing

Releasing

ProCarManuals.com

Pull the lever.
Opening

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/ 25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the hood. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.

Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least approx. 6.2 miles/10 km. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

260

Engine compartment Mobility

Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn signal/high beam lever. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.

3 Oil level down to minimum: Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 262.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 87. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Possible displays

3. "Engine oil level"

ProCarManuals.com

1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK" > "Measurement not possible at this time."

261

Mobility Engine compartment

ProCarManuals.com

> "Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level is below the minimum value, add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."
Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without delay.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 87. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil

If the engine oil is too high, have the vehicle checked immediately; failure to do so may result in engine damage.< Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<
Oil grades to add
Do not use oil additives as this could result in engine damage.< When selecting an engine oil, make sure to use one from the SAE viscosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do so may result in malfunctions or engine damage.< The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Some oil grades may not be available in all countries.
Approved oil grades
Gasoline engine BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30 BMW Longlife-01 BMW Longlife-01 FE
Diesel engine BMW Longlife-04

Additional information about approved oil grades is available at your BMW center.

Add up to 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil only after a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, the engine could be damaged.<

262

ProCarManuals.com

Engine compartment Mobility

Alternative oil types
If approved oils are not available, you can add quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the following specifications:
Gasoline engine API SM or higher
Diesel engine API ILSAC GF-5
Oil change
Oil changes should only be performed by a BMW center.

Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause burns.<
1. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center about suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may result. Because additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.<

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine overheats, a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.

263

Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW maintenance system advises you of necessary maintenance measures and helps you maintain the traffic and operating safety of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving. On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 87:

> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores servicerequirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your dealership Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore give your dealership Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 91; otherwise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.
BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<

264

ProCarManuals.com

Maintenance Mobility

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for checking components relevant to the composition of the vehicle's emissions.

Data memory
Your vehicle records data about the operation, faults, and user settings. These data are stored in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote control, and can be read out using suitable devices at your BMW center. The data that are read out are used to support service procedures and repairs or to optimize and expand vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist contract, certain vehicle data can also be transmitted directly from the vehicle in order to enable the desired services.

Emissions
The warning lamp lights up: The vehicle is producing higher emissions. The trip can be continued. Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning lamp.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp lights up if the fuel cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is correctly positioned and close it until it audibly clicks.

265

Mobility Care
Care

ProCarManuals.com

Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been material-tested, laboratory-checked and proven in the field, and offer optimal care and protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in damage.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles.<

Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months, ensure that the vehicle is washed more frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.< After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Give preference to car washes that use cloth or soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
Do not use high-pressure car washes; otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle around the windows.< Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 285.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 55.
> Maximum permissible tire width. Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.< Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna. > Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent
undesired wiper operation.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoilers or phone antennas, if they could be damaged.
> Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

266

ProCarManuals.com

Care Mobility

Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.
Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes > If you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 1407/606. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or temperature can lead to component damage or water penetration. Follow the operating instructions of the high-pressure washer.< When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park Distance Control, for an extended period and

maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from them.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers.< Observe local regulations pertaining to washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents. Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or insect remover and wash away with copious quantities of water. Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash. When you open a wet hardtop, water drops may run into the cargo area. If nec-
essary, remove items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of damaging substances. Region-specific environmental influences can damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is

267

Mobility Care

ProCarManuals.com

important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly. Immediately remove aggressive materials such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or bird droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar damage, such as that caused by stones hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent rusting.< BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off the clean paintwork surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products. Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals; otherwise, noise
and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive, especially when roads are treated with deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light-alloy wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acidfree rim cleaner.

Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline, or abrasive cleaning agents and do not use steam jets hotter than of 1407/ 606; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/ Alcantara fabrics
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt. To remove severe spots such as stains from beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong rubbing.< Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight irregularities in the leather are a typical characteristic of natural leather.< Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable.

268

ProCarManuals.com

Care Mobility

Treat the leather at least once every two months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.
Carpet and floor mats
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals; otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Displays
To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.<

Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces > Lamp glasses > Display pane of instrument cluster > Matte parts Clean with water and solvent-free plastic cleaner if necessary.

Vehicle storage
If you plan to park your vehicle for longer than three months, your BMW center will be happy to advise you.

Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.<

Interior sensors/cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of the High-beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.

269

Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components

Wiper blades

ProCarManuals.com

Onboard vehicle tool kit
Coupe

1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the hood.<

The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the cargo area. Remove the cover.
Convertible
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a pouch under the cargo area floor panel.

Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<
Replacement bulb sets are available at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch; otherwise, you could suffer burns.<

270

ProCarManuals.com

Replacing components Mobility

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the consumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<
For care of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
To replace lamps not described here, please contact your BMW center.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls, displays, and equipment in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours; otherwise, this could cause irritation of the retina.<
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may form on the interior of outside lamps. The condensation will disappear after a short time when driving with the headlamps switched on. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not defrost despite driving with the headlamps switched on, and additional moisture builds up, for example water droplets in the lamps, have them checked by your BMW center.
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails nevertheless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have all work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed only by your BMW center. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<
Access to the lamps
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the headlamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press the catches towards the rear, see arrows, and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reattach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover; otherwise, leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights
These lamps use LED technology for operation. If they malfunction, please contact your BMW center.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock. 2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.

271

Mobility Replacing components

3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor towards the right and fold it up.

Tail lamps
Coupe: overview
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.

ProCarManuals.com

4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb. 6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it. 7. Reattach the cover.
Turn signals, front
These lamps use LED technology for operation. If they malfunction, please contact your BMW center.
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts 1. Press the front edge of the lamp toward the
rear with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it out, arrow 2.

1 Backup lamp 2 Brake lamp 3 Parking/tail lamps 4 Turn signal 5 Brake Force Display lamp 6 Parking/tail lamps
Convertible: overview
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.

2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
To install, insert rear end of the lamp and press into place at the front.

1 Backup lamp 2 Brake lamp 3 Parking/tail lamps 4 Turn signal 5 Brake Force Display lamp 6 Parking/tail lamps

272

ProCarManuals.com

Replacing components Mobility

Backup lamp
If these lamps malfunction, please contact your BMW center.

Turn signal, brake, license plate, parking, and tail lamps
These lamps use LED technology for operation. If they malfunction, please contact your BMW center.
Coupe: Brake Force Display lamp in the trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the trim.
2. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Attach the bulb holder. 5. Attach trunk lid trim.
Convertible: Brake Force Display lamp in the trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts

1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder, refer to page 277. Unscrew the holder using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
6. Reattach the trim of the trunk lid and the holder for the warning triangle.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as standard. This eliminates the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 101.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-flat tires, page 257.
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 257.

273

Mobility Replacing components

The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your BMW center.<
Jack mounting points

Jump-starting terminals
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting on page 278.

ProCarManuals.com

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.< After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets built into the vehicle at the plant; doing so may damage the vehicle.<

Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 90.
> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 174.
> Navigation system Operability must be waited for, refer to page 148.
> Glass roof It may happen that the roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 53.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 125.
> Active steering The system automatically initializes itself briefly during a trip. The system is deactivated during this time, refer to page 105.
> xDrive The system automatically initializes itself during a trip. Indicator lamps light up during this time. If the lamps do not go out during the current trip, have the system checked.

274

Replacing components Mobility
Disposal of old battery
Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or bring them to a collection point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; otherwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and remove it. Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor box. See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment. Spare fuses are available at your BMW center.

ProCarManuals.com

275

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance

It may be possible for a BMW center to reactivate the system after a new contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

Emergency Request

ProCarManuals.com

Requirements
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. > Radio readiness is switched on. > The BMW Assist system is logged into a
mobile phone network that is supported by BMW Assist.
> The Emergency Request system is operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Subscriber contract
Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without a workshop visit.
After the system is deactivated, it is no longer possible to make Emergency Requests.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button comes on.
> The LED comes on: the Emergency Request has been triggered.
If the circumstances allow, remain in the vehicle until the voice contact has been established.
> The LED flashes when the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.
Data for determining the necessary rescue measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the current position of your vehicle, if it can be determined.

276

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility

> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you, however.

Convertible

Automatically triggering an Emergency Request
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. An automatic Emergency Request is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by phone around the clock in many countries. You can obtain support there in the event of a breakdown.

The first aid pouch is located in a compartment under the front passenger seat. To open: press the button and fold the cover down. To close: fold the cover back up and press it into the catch.
Warning triangle
Coupe

First aid pouch
Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.

Coupe

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side of the cargo area. Press the tab to take it out.

ProCarManuals.com

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo area in a storage area.

277

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance

Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 259. The cap is marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.

ProCarManuals.com

Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise, there is a danger of shorting.<

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

278

ProCarManuals.com

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility

5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper: Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
Rear

Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehicles.< Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit underneath the cover on the right-hand side of the cargo area, refer to page 270.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit underneath the cargo area floor, refer to page 270.

Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 61; otherwise, the low-beam headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<

279

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance

ProCarManuals.com

Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever positions, refer to page 64.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph or 70 km/h and a towing distance of 90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged.<
Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are immobilized. When using the car wash function, refer to page 267, note that the parking lock P is engaged automatically after approx. 30 minutes, blocking the rear wheels. In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the vehicle must be towed for more than approx. 20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually, refer to page 69.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maximum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.<

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset. Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Manual and automatic transmission:

Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.<

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch:

With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.

280

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.<

ProCarManuals.com

Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface only.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possible; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 278Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission or Sport automatic transmission with double clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent Control HDC when the vehicle is being tow-started, page 99.<

281

ProCarManuals.com

Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG

Reference Technical data
Technical data

ular vehicle, for example due to the options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Engine data
Coupe

ProCarManuals.com

Displacement Number of cylinders Maximum power output at engine speed Maximum torque with Overboost at engine speed
Convertible

cu in/cm
hp rpm lb ft/Nm lb ft/Nm rpm

Displacement Number of cylinders Maximum power output at engine speed Maximum torque with Overboost at engine speed

cu in/cm
hp rpm lb ft/Nm lb ft/Nm rpm

328i/xDrive 335i/xDrive

335is

182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979

230

300

320

6,500

5,800

5,900

200/270

300/407

332/450

369/500

2,750 1,300-5,000

1,500

328i

335i

335is

182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979

230

300

320

6,500

5,800

5,900

200/270

300/407

332/450

369/500

2,750 1,300-5,000

1,500

284

Dimensions
Coupe

Technical data Reference

ProCarManuals.com

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m 335i: height approx. 54.1 in/1,375 mm

285

Reference Technical data
Convertible

ProCarManuals.com

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m 335i: height approx. 54.0 in/1,370 mm

286

Technical data Reference

Weights

Coupe

328i

328i xDrive

335i

335i xDrive

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,288/1,945 4,508/2,045 4,486/2,035 4,663/2,115

> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,354/1,975 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045 4,685/2,125

Load

lbs./kg

882/400

Approved front axle load

lbs./kg 2,061/935 2,227/1,010 2,172/985 2,326/1,055

Approved rear axle load

lbs./kg 2,425/1,100 2,447/1,110 2,469/1,120 2,513/1,140

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

165/75

Cargo area capacity

cu ft/ liters

15.5/440

15.2/430

Approved gross weight > with manual transmission > Sport automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity

lbs./kg lbs./kg
lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg
cu ft/ liters

335is
4,497/2,040 4,519/2,050
882/400 2,183/990 2,513/1,140
165/75 15.2/430

ProCarManuals.com

287

Reference Technical data
Convertible

Approved gross weight > with manual transmission lbs./kg > with automatic transmission lbs./kg > Sport automatic transmis- lbs./kg
sion with double clutch

Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo area capacity

lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg
cu ft/ liters

328i

335i

335is

4,707/2,135 4,817/2,185 4,839/2,195

4,773/2,165 4,839/2,195

4,872/2,210

838/380

2,138/970 2,205/1,000 2,227/1,010

2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200

7.4-12.4/ 210-350

ProCarManuals.com

288

Capacities
Fuel tank including reserve of Window washer system including headlamp washers

Technical data Reference

US gal/liters US gal/liters
US quarts/liters

Notes approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 237 approx. 2.1/8.0
For more details: page 72 approx. 6.3/6.0

ProCarManuals.com

289

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system
Short commands for the voice activation system

General information
For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 25.
Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}.
The following short commands are for vehicles with the voice activation system. They do not function with equipment packages that permit only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.

ProCarManuals.com

Useful short commands
Function
Opening a music collection Opening the tone control Opening the settings Accessing the onboard computer Opening the contacts Displaying phone book Accessing services Accessing BMW Assist Accessing ConnectedDrive Opening the home address Opening destination entry Opening destination guidance

Command
{Music collection} {Tone} {Settings} {Onboard info} {Contacts} {Phonebook} {Assist} {B M W Assist} {Connected Drive} {Home address} {Enter address} {Guidance}

290

ProCarManuals.com

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive
Function
Selecting a track
Playing back a CD Selecting a CD Selecting a CD and track Opening the CD and Multimedia menu CD and DVD Displaying entertainment details on the Split screen

Command
{Track ...} e.g. track 5 or {C D track ...} e.g. CD track 5 {C D on} {Select C D} {C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5 {C D and multimedia} {C D} {Entertainment details}

Music collection
Function
Searching for music; opening the menu Calling up the current playback Opening a music collection Playing back a music collection Playing back the most frequently played tracks

Command
{Music search} {Current playback} {Music collection} {Music collection on} {Top fifty}

External devices
Function
Opening external devices Accessing Bluetooth devices AUX front

Command
{External devices} {Bluetooth} {AUX}

Tone control
Function
Opening the tone control

Command
{Tone}

291

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

ProCarManuals.com

Radio
FM
Function
Selecting a station directly Calling up the radio Calling up an FM station Opening manual search Selecting the frequency range Calling up a station
AM
Function
Calling up an AM station Opening manual search
Satellite radio
Function
Calling up the satellite radio Switching on the satellite radio Selecting a satellite radio channel
Presets
Function
Opening the stored stations Choosing a stored station Selecting a stored station

Command
{Station ...} e.g. National Public Radio {Radio} {F M} {Manual} {Select frequency} {Select station}
Command
{A M} {Manual}
Command
{Satellite radio} {Satellite radio on} {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Command
{Presets} {Select preset} {Preset ...} e.g. stored station 2

292

ProCarManuals.com

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

Telephone
Function
Dialing a phone number Opening the Telephone menu Displaying phone book Redialing Displaying accepted calls Displaying the list of messages Displaying Bluetooth devices

Command
{Dial number} {Telephone} {Phonebook} {Redial} {Received calls} {Messages} {Bluetooth}

Office
Function
Opening Office menu Displaying current Office Displaying contacts Displaying messages Displaying calendar Displaying tasks Displaying reminders

Command
{Office} {Current office} {Contacts} {Messages} {Calendar} {Tasks} {Reminders}

Contacts
Function
Select a name Opening the contacts My contacts New contact

Command
{Choose name} {Contacts} {My contacts} {New contact}

293

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

ProCarManuals.com

Navigation
General information
Function
Navigation menu Opening destination entry Entering an address Opening destination guidance Starting destination guidance Ending destination guidance Opening the home address Opening the route criteria Opening the route Switching on the voice instructions Repeating a voice instruction Switching off the voice instructions Displaying the address book Displaying the last destinations Opening the traffic bulletins Special destinations
Map
Function
Displaying the map Map facing north Map in the direction of travel Perspective map Automatic map scaling Changing the scale Scale...meters
Scale...kilometers

Command
{Navigation} {Enter address} {Enter address} {Guidance} {Start guidance} {Stop guidance} {Home address} {Route preference} {Route information} {Switch on voice instructions} {Repeat voice instructions} {Switch off voice instructions} {Address book} {Last destinations} {Traffic Info} {Points of interest}
Command
{Map} {Map facing north} {Map in direction of travel} {Map perspective view} {Map with automatic scaling} {Map scale} {Map scale ... meters} e.g. map scale of 100 meters {Map scale ... kilometers} e.g. Split screen scale of 5 kilometers

294

ProCarManuals.com

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

Split screen settings

Function
Split screen Switching off the Split screen Adapting the Split screen Split screen, current position Split screen, map facing north Split screen, direction of travel Split screen, perspective Expanded intersection zoom on the Split screen Split screen scale ... meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins Split screen, computer Split screen, trip computer Automatically scaling the Split screen

Command
{Switch on splitscreen} {Turn off split screen} {Split screen content} {Split screen current position} {Split screen map facing north} {Split screen map in direction of travel} {Split screen perspective} {Splitscreen Exit ramp view} {Split screen scale ... meters} e.g. Split screen scale of 100 meters {Split screen scale ... kilometers} e.g. Split screen scale of 5 kilometers {Split screen, Traffic conditions} {Split screen on board info} {Splitscreen trip computer} {Split screen automatic scaling}

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function
Entering a new destination Trip list

Command
{Enter address} {Stored trips}

Contacts
Function
Opening the contacts My contacts New contact

Command
{Contacts} {My contacts} {New contact}

ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function
Accessing BMW Assist Accessing ConnectedDrive Accessing BMW Online

Command
{B M W Assist} {Connected Drive} {B M W Online}

295

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

Vehicle information
Function
Accessing the onboard computer Opening the trip computer Opening the vehicle information Opening the vehicle status

Command
{Onboard info} {Trip computer} {Vehicle info} {Vehicle status}

ProCarManuals.com

Settings
Vehicle
Function
Opening the main menu Opening the settings Opening the options Settings on the Control Display Opening the time and date settings Opening the language and unit settings Opening the speed limit settings Opening the light settings Opening the door lock settings Opening profiles
Equipment
Function
Opening the air conditioning settings

Command
{Main menu} {Settings} {Options} {Control display} {Time and date} {Language and units} {Speed} {Lighting} {Door locks} {Profiles}
Command
{Climate}

296

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

ProCarManuals.com

297

Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z

Index

ProCarManuals.com

A
ABS Antilock Brake System 97
ACC, refer to Active Cruise Control 75
Acceleration assistant, refer to Launch Control 70
Accessories, refer to Vehicle equipment 5
Accident, refer to Sending an Emergency Request 276
Activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 120
Active Cruise Control 75 indicator lamp 78 malfunction 79 selecting distance 77 sensor 78 Active steering 105 Adaptive brake lamp Brake Force Display 106 Adaptive Light Control 112 Additives coolant 263 engine oil 262 Address, entering 150, 156 Address for navigation entering 150 Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic climate control 117 Adjusting the thigh support 49 Airbags 107 indicator/warning lamp 108 sitting safely 47 Air conditioning mode automatic climate control 117 ventilation 119

Air distribution automatic 118 Airing, refer to Ventilation 119 Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 239 Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air mode 118 Air supply automatic climate
control 117 ventilation 119 Air vents 116 Air volume 118 AKI, refer to Fuel grade 237 Alarm system 37 avoiding unintentional
alarms 38 interior motion sensor 38 switching off an alarm 37 tilt alarm sensor 37 ALL program 119 All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 258 All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 99 Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 118 Antifreeze coolant 263 washer fluid 72 Antilock Brake System
ABS 97 Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 37 Appointments, refer to
Calendar 223 Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 287 Approved engine oils 262 Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 287

Apps 232 Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 126 Arrival time, refer to
Computer 84 Ashtray 128 Assist systems, refer to
Driving stability control 97 AUC Automatic recirculated
air control 118 Audible instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 161 Audio device, external 127 Automatic air distribution 118 air volume 118 cruise control 73, 75 headlamp control 110 Automatic car washes 266 Automatic climate control 116 Automatic curb monitor 55 Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to Highbeam Assistant 113 Automatic recirculated air control AUC 118 Automatic Service Request 232 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 interlock 64 overriding selector lever lock 66 shiftlock, refer to Changing selector lever position 64 sport program 65 towing 279 tow-starting 279 AUTO program for automatic climate control 118

298

Everything from A to Z Reference

ProCarManuals.com

AUX-IN port 127 Available services 232 Average fuel consumption 84 setting the units 87 Average speed 84 Avoid highways in
navigation 159 Avoiding unintentional
alarms 38 Axle loads, refer to
Weights 287
B
Backrest contour, refer to Lumbar support 49
Backrests, refer to Seat adjustment 48
Backrest width adjustment 49 Back seats refer to Rear seats 51 Bag holder 131 Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 277 Bar, refer to Towing
methods 280 Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone refer to Snap-in adapter 216 refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage compartment 126 Battery 274 charging 274 disposal 40, 275 jump-starting 278 remote control 30 replacing 274 temporary power failure 274 Battery renewal remote control 40 remote control for vehicle 40 Being towed 279 Belt hand-over 54 pinch protection system 54 Belts, refer to Safety belts 53

Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 53
Beverage holders, refer to Cupholders 128
Black ice, refer to Outside temperature warning 82
Blinds, refer to Roller sunblinds 126
Blower, refer to Air volume 118
Bluetooth, activating/ deactivating 205
BMW car shampoo 269 BMW Assist 228 updating 232 BMW Homepage 4 BMW Info 222 BMW Maintenance
System 264 BMW Online 230 BMW webpage 4 Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 128 Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 97 Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 87 Brake Force Display 106 Brake lamps Brake Force Display 106 Brake pads 138 breaking in 138 Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely 140 Brake rotors 141 brakes 138 breaking in 138 Brakes ABS 97 BMW Maintenance
System 264 Brake Force Display 106 breaking in 138 parking brake 63 service requirements 87

Brakes, refer to Braking safely 140
Brake system 138 BMW Maintenance
System 264 breaking in 138 disc brakes 141 Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 277 Breaking in the clutch 138 Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and differential 138 Break-in period 138 Brightness of the Control Display 94 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 270 Button for starting the engine, refer to Start/Stop button 61 Buttons on the steering wheel 11
C
Calendar 223 displaying appointment 223 selecting calendar day 223 California Proposition 65
warning 6 Call accepting 209 ending 210 muting the microphone 211 rejecting 209 Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 210 Calling, refer to Telephone
owner's manual Calls with multiple parties 210 Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 128 Capacities 289 Capacity of the cargo area 287 Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 274

299

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Car care, refer to Care 266 Care 266 automatic car washes 266 care products 266 carpets 269 CD/DVD drives 269 chrome parts 268 displays 269 exterior 266 fine wood parts 269 headlamps 267 high-pressure washer 267 interior 268 leather 268 light-alloy wheels 268 paintwork 267 plastic parts 269 retractable hardtop 267 rubber seals 268 safety belts 269 sensors and cameras 269 upholstery and cloth
trim 268 washing the car
manually 267 windows 267 Cargo, securing 143 Cargo area capacity 287 Comfort Access 39 folding up the floor
panel 132 lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 114 opening from inside 35 opening from outside 36 Cargo loading 141 securing cargo 143 stowing cargo 142 vehicle 141 Car jack jacking points 274 Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 30

Car phone installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126 refer to separate Owner's
Manual Car phone, refer to
Telephone 204 Car shampoo 269 Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 140 Center armrest 126 Center brake lamp replacing bulb 273 Center console, refer to
Around the center console 14 Central locking from inside 35 from outside 31 Central locking system 31 Comfort Access 38 hotel function 36 setting unlocking characteristics 32 Changes, technical, refer to For your own safety 5 Changing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 270 Changing gears 68 Changing the language on the Control Display 94 Changing the measurement units on the Control Display 87 Changing wheels 273 Chassis number, refer to Engine compartment 259 Check Control 92 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 58 Child restraint systems 57 Child seats, refer to Transporting children safely 57 Chrome parts 269 Chrome polish 269

Cigarette lighter, refer to Lighter 129
Cleaning headlamps 72 washer fluid 72 Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 266 Climate control automatic air
distribution 118 Clock 82 12h/24h mode 91 setting the time and date 90 setting time 90 Closing from inside 35 from outside 32 Clothes hooks 127 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 62 Comfort Access 38 replacing the battery 40 Comfort access, refer to
Comfort Access 38 Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14 Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition lock 61 Compass 124 Computer 84 displays on Control Display 84 Computer, refer to iDrive 18 Concierge service 229 Condensation, refer to When the vehicle is parked 141 Condition Based Service CBS 264 Configuring settings, refer to Personal Profile 30 Confirmation signal for vehicle locking/unlocking 33 ConnectedDrive 228 Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 129

300

Everything from A to Z Reference

ProCarManuals.com

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 84
Contacts 218 deleting 220, 227 exporting/importing 227 new contact 219 Control Center, refer to
iDrive 18 Control Display 19 switching off 19 Control Display, refer to
iDrive 18 adjusting brightness 94 Controller, refer to iDrive 18 Controls and displays 10 Control unit, refer to iDrive 18 Convenient loading in
Convertible 33 Convenient opening and
closing glass roof 32 glass roof with Comfort
Access 39 retractable hardtop 32 windows 32 windows with Comfort
Access 39 with Comfort Access 39 Convertible bag holder 131 convenient loading 33 enlarging cargo area 130 folding down rear
backrest 130 retractable hardtop 43 rollover protection
system 109 securing cargo 143 stowing cargo 142 Coolant 263 checking level 263 Coolant temperature 263 Cooling, maximum 117 Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 263

Cooling system, refer to Coolant 263
Copyright 2 Corner-illuminating lamps replacing bulbs 271 Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 112 Correct tires 257 Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 114 Criteria for route 159 Cross-hairs in navigation 155 Cruise control 73 active 75 malfunction 75 Cruise control, refer to Active
Cruise Control 75 Cruising range 84 Cupholders 128 Curb weight, refer to
Weights 287 Customer Relations 231
D
Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 114
Data, technical 284 capacities 289 dimensions 285 engine 284 weights 287 Data memory 265 Data transfer 232 Date date format 91 setting 91 Daytime running lights 111 replacing bulbs 271 DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 97 Deactivating front passenger
airbags 107

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 32
Defect door lock 34 fuel filler flap 236 glass roof 42 Defining a home address 219 Destination, entering by town/
city name 150 Destination address entering 150, 156 Destination entry via BMW
Assist 155 Destination for navigation entering by voice 156 entering via map 155 entry 150 home address 153 manual entry 150 Destination guidance 159 bypassing a route
section 160 changing specified
route 159 continuing 159 starting 159 voice instructions 161 volume of voice
instructions 161 Digital clock 82 Digital compass 124 Dimensions 285 Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 71 Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 161 Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 152 Displacement, refer to Engine
data 284 Display, refer to iDrive
controls 18 Displaying contact
pictures 219 Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 114

301

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Displays on the Control Display 18 Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12 Displays and controls 10 Disposal coolant 263 remote control battery 40 vehicle battery 275 Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service requirements 87 Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 96 Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30 Door lock 34 Doors, emergency operation 34 DOT Quality Grades 255 Draft-free ventilation 120 Drinks holders, refer to Cupholders 128 Drive mode 68 Drive-off assistance, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97 Drive-off assistant 100 Driving dynamics control 69 Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 110 Driving notes 138 Driving off on hills, refer to Drive-off assistant 100 Driving stability control systems 97 Driving through water 140 Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 138 Dry air, refer to Cooling function 119

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 97
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 98
indicator/warning lamp 98 Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 97 Dynamic destination
guidance 166 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97 indicator/warning lamp 98
E
EBV Electronic brake-force distribution 97
Electrical defect 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch 69 Electrical malfunction door lock 34 driver's door 34 fuel filler flap 236 glass roof 42 Electric seat adjustment 49 Electric steering wheel lock with Comfort Access 39 Electronic brake-force distribution EBV 97 Electronic oil level check 260 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97 E-mail 222 Emergency actuation, automatic transmission, refer to Overriding selector lever lock 66 Emergency operation fuel filler flap, manual release 236

Emergency operation, refer to Closing manually
glass roof 42 Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation door lock 34 Emergency release trunk lid from inside 36 Emergency Request 276 Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 277 Energy, saving saving fuel 138 Engine breaking in 138 data 284 overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 263 speed 284 starting 62 starting, Comfort Access 38 switching off 63 Engine compartment 259 Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 263 Engine oil adding 262 additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 262 alternative oil types 263 approved engine oils 262 BMW Maintenance
System 264 capacity 289 checking level 260 intervals between changes,
refer to Service requirements 87 Engine output, refer to Engine data 284 Engine speed, refer to Engine data 284 Engine starting, refer to Starting the engine 62

302

ProCarManuals.com

Everything from A to Z Reference

Entering the postal code for navigation 151
Entry lamps, refer to Interior lamps 114
Entry map for destination 155 ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97 Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 140 Exterior mirrors 55 adjusting 55 automatic dimming feature 56 automatic heating 55 folding in and out 55 External audio device 127 Eyes for tow-starting and towing away 279 for tying down loads 143
F
Failure messages, refer to Check Control 92
Failure of an electrical consumer 275
False alarm avoiding unintentional
alarm 38 switching off an alarm 37 Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 53 Fastest route for
navigation 159 Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 92 Filter refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic climate control 120 First aid pouch 277 Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 61

Flash when locking/ unlocking 33
Flat tire Run-flat tires 258 Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 indicating a flat tire 101 indicator/warning lamp 101 initialization 100 snow chains 100, 258 system limits 100 Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 256 Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 72 Fog lamps 114 indicator lamp 13, 114 Folding up the floor panel 132 Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 114 For your own safety 5 Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 99 Front airbags 107 FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 100 Fuel 237 average consumption 84 gauge 83 high-quality brands 237 quality 237 specifications 237 tank contents, refer to
Capacities 289 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 83 Fuel consumption indicator average fuel
consumption 84 Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 83 Fuel filler flap 236 releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 236 Fuses 275

G
Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 122
Gasoline refer to Average
consumption 84 Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 237 Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 83 Gas station
recommendations 161 Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 64 Gear indicator, refer to Displays in the instrument cluster 67 Gearshift lever 66 automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 manual transmission 64 Gearshifts automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 manual transmission 64 General driving notes 139 Glass roof, electric 41 closing after electrical malfunction 42 convenient opening and closing 32, 34 convenient opening and closing with Comfort Access 39 initializing 42 opening, closing 42 pinch protection system 42 power failure 42 remote control 32 tilting 41 Glove compartment 126 GPS navigation, refer to Navigation system 148

303

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Grills 116 Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 287
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 63
Hands-free system 14, 213 Hazard warning flashers 14 HDC Hill Descent Control 99 Head airbags 107 Headlamp control,
automatic 110 Headlamp flasher 71 indicator lamp 11, 13 Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 112 Head restraints 50 rear, removing 51 sitting safely 47 Heated mirrors 55 rear window 119 seats 53 steering wheel 56 Heating mirrors 55 rear window 119 seats 53 steering wheel 56 Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 116 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 142 Height, refer to
Dimensions 285 Height adjustment seats 48 steering wheel 56 High-beam Assistant 113 High beams 112 headlamp flasher 112 indicator lamp 13 High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to Highbeam Assistant 113

High-pressure washer 266, 267
High water, refer to Driving through water 140
Highways, refer to Route criteria 159
Hill Descent Control HDC 99 Hills 141 Holders for cups 128 Homepage BMW 4 Hood 260 Hooks for shopping bags 131 Horn 10, 11 Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking separately 36 Hot exhaust system 140 Hydraulic brake assist, refer to Dynamic Brake Control 97 Hydroplaning 140
I
Ice warning, refer to Outside temperature warning 82
Identification marks Run-flat tires 258 tire coding 255 iDrive 18 adjusting brightness 94 changing date and time 90 changing language 94 changing settings 94 changing units of measure
and display format 87 controls 18 menu guidance 19 operating principle 18 overview 18 start menu 19 status information 21 iDrive operating principle 18 Ignition 62 switched off 62 switched on 62

Ignition key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30
Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 61
Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 62
Ignition lock 61 Imprint 2 Incoming call 209 Indicator and warning
lamps 13 Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 103 Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 239 Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 102 Initializing after power failure 274 compass, refer to Calibrating 125 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 glass roof 42 refer to Setting the time and date 90 Installation location telephone 126 Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 161 Instrument cluster 12 Instrument cluster, refer to Cockpit 10 Instrument combination, refer to Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 114 Integrated key 30 Integrated universal remote control 122 Interactive map 155 Interior lamps 114 remote control 33 Interior motion sensor 38

304

ProCarManuals.com

Everything from A to Z Reference

Interior rearview mirror 56 automatic dimming
feature 56 compass 124 Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 64 Intermittent mode of the
wipers 71 Intersection, entering,
navigation 151
J
Jacking points 274 Joystick, refer to iDrive 18 Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 278 Jump-starting 278
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/ remote control 30
Keyless go, refer to Comfort Access 38
Keyless opening and closing, refer to Comfort Access 38
Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 30
Keypad dialing 212 Kickdown 65 automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65 Knock control 237
L
Lamps automatic headlamp
control 110 parking lamps/low
beams 110 Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 270 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 53

Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 143
Last destinations 153 LATCH child restraint fixing
system 58 Launch Control 70 Leather care 268 LED Light-emitting
diodes 271 Length, refer to
Dimensions 285 License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 273 Light high-beam assistant 113 Light-alloy wheels 268 Light-emitting diodes
LED 271 Lighter 129 connecting electrical
appliances 129 Lighting instruments 114 lamps and bulbs 270 vehicle, refer to Lamps 110 Light switch 110 Limit, refer to Speed limit 93 Load 142 Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 143 Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 35 Locking adjusting confirmation
signal 33 from inside 35 from outside 32 without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 38 Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 33 from inside 35 from outside 32 Low beam control, refer to
High-beam Assistant 113

Low-beam headlamps 110 automatic 110 Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 49 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 143 Lumbar support 49
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter tires 258
Maintenance, refer to Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Maintenance system 264 Malfunction automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66 tires 101 Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 92 Manual car wash 267 Manually unlocking parking
lock 69 Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 65 Manual operation door lock 34 driver's door 34 fuel filler flap 236 glass roof 42 parking lock 69 parking lock, automatic transmission 66 Manual transmission 64 Map for navigation changing scale 163 entering destination 155 Map view 162

305

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Master key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30
Maximum cooling 117 Maximum speed with winter tires 258 Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 285 Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53 MENU button 18 Menus, refer to iDrive 18 Messages 220 Messages from the Concierge
service 221 Microfilter BMW Maintenance
System 264 for automatic climate
control 120 Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter BMW Maintenance
System 264 Microphone telephone 14 voice commands 14 Mirror dimming feature 56 Mirrors 55 automatic curb monitor 55 exterior mirrors 55 heating 55 interior rearview mirror 56 memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53 Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 55

Mobile phone adjusting volume 209 connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 205 installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126 operation 209 pairing 205 refer to separate Owner's
Manual suitable mobile phones 204 unpairing 207 what to do if.... 208 Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center armrest 126 Mobile phone, refer to Telephone 204 Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5 Monitor, refer to iDrive controls 18 Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 100 Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11 Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/ headlamp flasher 71 refer to Wiper system 71 Multimedia screen, refer to iDrive 18 My Info 221
N
Navigation starting destination
guidance after entering a destination 152 storing current position 152 voice activation 156

Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 161
Navigation data 148 Navigation system 148 address book 152 bypassing a route
section 160 continuing destination
guidance 159 destination entry 150 dynamic destination
guidance 166 entering a destination by
voice 156 entering a destination
manually 150 frequently asked
questions 167 gas station
recommendations 161 planning a trip 157 route list 160 selecting destination via
map 155 selecting route criteria 159 special destinations 153 starting destination
guidance 159 terminating destination
guidance 159 traffic bulletins 163 voice instructions 161 volume adjustment 161 Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 50 Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 127 Neutral 67 New tires 257 Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service CBS 264 North-facing map 162 Notes 224 Nozzles 116

306

ProCarManuals.com

Everything from A to Z Reference

Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 284
Nylon rope, refer to Tow rope 280
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket for Onboard Diagnosis 265
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 237
Odometer 82 Office 217 current office 217 what to do if.... 225 Oil, refer to Engine oil 260 Oil consumption 260 Oil level 260 Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 275 Onboard vehicle tool kit 270 Opening and closing Comfort Access 38 from inside 35 from outside 32 using the door lock 34 using the remote control 32 Opening and closing
retractable hardtop 44 Options, selecting for
navigation 159 Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 19 Outlets refer to Ventilation 119 Output, refer to Engine
data 284 Outside-air mode automatic climate
control 118 Outside temperature
display 82 changing unit of measure 87 in computer 87 Outside temperature
warning 82

Overheated engine, refer to Coolant temperature 263
Overriding selector lever lock 66
P
Paintwork care 267 Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 96 Park Distance Control PDC 96 Parked car ventilation 120 preselecting switch-on
times 120 switching on and off
directly 120 Parking vehicle 63 Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 96 Parking brake 63 indicator lamp 63 Parking lamps 110 replacing bulbs 271 Parking lamps/low beams 110 Parts and accessories, refer to
Vehicle equipment 5 Passenger side mirror tilt
function 55 Pathway lighting 111 Personal information, refer to
Office 217 Personal Profile 30 Phone numbers dialing 210 Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 42 windows 41 Polish 269 Pollen refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic climate control 120 Power failure 274 Power windows 40

Power windows, refer to Windows 40
Pressure, tires 239 Pressure monitoring, tires 100 Flat Tire Monitor 100 Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 102 Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11 Programmable memory keys 23 Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 42 windows 41 Providing medical assistance, refer to First aid pouch 277 Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 100
R
Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 61
Radio readiness 61 switched off 62 switched on 61 Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with integrated key 30 Rain sensor 72 Reading aloud 225 Reading lamps 115 Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps 272 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 51 folding down backrests 130 Rear ventilation 120 Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 55 Rear window defroster 119 Rear window roller blind, refer to Roller sunblinds 126 Recirculated air mode 118

307

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Recirculation of air, refer to Recirculated air mode 118
Reclining seat, refer to Backrest 48
Redialing 212 Refueling 236 Releasing hood 260 Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 84 Reminders 224 Remote control 30 battery renewal 40 Comfort Access 38 garage door opener 122 malfunction 34, 39 removing from the ignition
lock 61 service data 264 trunk lid 33 Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 275 Replacement remote
control 30 Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 270 Replacing tires 257 Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 257 Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 83 Restraint systems for children 57 refer to Safety belts 53 Retractable hardtop 43 care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure convenient opening and
closing 32 remote control 32 Reverse gear 67 automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65 manual transmission 64

Road map 162 Roadside
Assistance 229, 277 Roadside parking lamps 112 replacing bulbs 271 Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 87 Roller sunblinds 126 Rollover protection system,
Convertible 109 resetting 109 Roof load capacity 287 Roof-mounted luggage
rack 143 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 280 Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 18 Route 159, 160 bypassing sections 160 changing 159, 160 changing criteria 159 displaying streets or towns/
cities 160 map view 162 selecting 159 Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance through voice instructions 161 Route map, refer to Map view 162 Route section, changing 160 Route selection 159 RSC Runflat System Component, refer to Runflat tires 258 Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 258

Run-flat tires 258 continuing driving with a
damaged tire 101 flat tire 101 Flat Tire Monitor 101 inflation pressure 239 new tires 257 tire replacement 257 winter tires 258 Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 258
S
Safety-belt height adjustment 54
Safety belts 53 belt hand-over 54 damage 54 indicator/warning lamp 54 reminder 54 sitting safely 47 Safety systems airbags 107 Antilock Brake System
ABS 97 brake system 97 driving stability control 97 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97 rollover protection system,
Convertible 109 safety belts 53 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 258 Saving fuel 138 Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 18 Screw thread for tow
fitting 279 Seat adjustment electric 49 mechanical 48 Seat and mirror memory 53

308

Everything from A to Z Reference

ProCarManuals.com

Seat belt reminder, refer to Fasten safety belts reminder 54
Seat heating 53 Seats 48 adjusting electrically 49 adjusting the seats 48 heating 53 memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53 saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 53 sitting safely 47 Securing cargo 133, 134 Securing the vehicle from inside 35 from outside 32 Selecting distance for Active
Cruise Control 77 Selecting new scale for
navigation 163 Selector lever automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64 Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever positions, shiftlock 64 Selector lever positions 66 automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 277 Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 277 Service data in the remote control 264 Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 264 Service Request 231 Service requirements 87 Service status 232 Settings changing settings on the Control Display 94 clock, 12h/24h format 91 language 94

Settings and information 86 Settings for the map view 163 Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on times 120 Shifting 68 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 68 Shifting gears automatic transmission with Steptronic 65 manual transmission 64 Shift into a drive position, refer to selector lever positions 66 Shiftlock automatic transmission, refer to Changing selector lever positions 64 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 68 Short commands for the voice activation system 290 Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 159 Side airbags 107 Side windows, refer to Windows 40 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10, 11 Sitting safely 47 with airbags 47 with head restraint 47 with safety belts 47 Ski bag 132 Ski bag for Convertible, refer to Through-loading opening with integrated transport bag 133 Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass roof, electric 41 Slot for remote control 61 Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 129 Snap-in adapter 204 inserting/removing 216

Snap-in adapter, refer to Center armrest storage compartment 126
Socket, Onboard Diagnosis OBD 265
Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 129
SOS, refer to Sending an Emergency Request 276
Spare fuses 275 Special destinations 153 Special destinations,
displaying 155 Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 262 Specified engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 262 Speed Run-flat tires 101 with winter tires 258 Speed limit 93 Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 93 Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12 Speedometer 12 Split screen content, refer to
Selecting the display for the split screen content 22 Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 66 driving dynamics control 69 kickdown 68 Launch Control 70 manually unlocking parking lock 69 neutral 67 reverse gear 67 Sport program with 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 68 Spray nozzles, refer to Cleaning windshield and headlamps 72

309

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 97
Start/Stop button 61 starting the engine 62 switching off the engine 63 Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 62 Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 278 Starting difficulties jump-starting 278 Starting the engine Start/Stop button 61 Start menu 19 State/province, for
navigation 150 Status information on the
Control Display 21 Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5 Steam jet 266, 267 Steering wheel 56 adjustment 56 buttons on steering
wheel 11 heating 56 lock 61 locking with Comfort
Access 39 shift paddles 68 Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 68 Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 105 Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with Steptronic 64 Storage 269 Storage compartments 127 Storage nets 131 Stored trip, calling up 158 Storing a destination in the address book 152 Storing seat positions, refer to Seat and mirror memory 53

Storing tires 258 Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 127 Street, entering,
navigation 151 Suitable mobile phones 204 Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 239 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 63 Switching off the engine Start/Stop button 61 Switching the cooling function
on and off 119 Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 120 Symbols 4
T
Tachometer 83 Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 35 Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 272 Tail lamps 272 replacing bulb 272, 273 Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 289 Tasks 223 Technical data 284 dimensions 285 Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5 Telephone 204 hands-free system 213 installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126 phone book 212 received calls 213 redialing 212 refer to separate Owner's
Manual voice commands 214 TeleService 229 Teleservice Diagnosis 230

Temperature automatic climate
control 117 changing unit of measure 87 coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 263 Temperature display outside temperature 82 outside temperature
warning 82 setting the units 87 Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 73 Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 143 Text message 221 Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 273 Through-loading opening with
integrated transport bag 133 Through-loading system 130 Tilt alarm sensor 37 Tilt function, passenger side mirror 55 Timer, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 120 Tire inflation pressure 239 loss 101, 102 Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 100 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 102 resetting the system 103 system limitations 102 warning lamp 103 Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 101 Tire Quality Grading 255

310

Everything from A to Z Reference

ProCarManuals.com

Tires age 255, 257 air loss 103 breaking in 138 changing, refer to Changing
wheels 273 condition 256 damage 256 inflation pressure 239 labels 255 minimum tread depth 256 new wheels and tires 257 pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 100 pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 102 puncture 101 replacing 257 Run-flat tires 258 size 255 storage 258 tread depth 256 wear indicators, refer to Minimum tread depth 256 wheel/tire combination, refer to Correct wheels and tires 257 winter tires 258 TMC station, refer to Traffic bulletins 163 Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 270 Top, refer to Retractable hardtop 43 Torque, refer to Engine data 284 Tow bar 280 Tow fitting 279 screw thread 279 Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 279

Towing 279 car with automatic
transmission 279 methods 280 with 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch 280 Towing and tow-starting 279 Town/city, for navigation 150 Tow rope 280 Tow-starting 279, 281 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 102 Traction control, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 97 Traffic bulletins categories 165 Traffic bulletins, filtering 165 Traffic bulletins for navigation 163 during destination guidance 165 Traffic bulletins in navigation screen display in the map view 165 Traffic congestion displaying traffic bulletins 163 refer to Route, bypassing segments 160 Transmission 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 66 automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 idle position 67 Launch Control 70 manually unlocking parking lock 69 manual transmission 64 overriding selector lever lock for automatic transmission with Steptronic 66 reverse gear 67

Transmission interlock refer to Changing selector
lever position 64 refer to P Park 64 Transporting children
safely 57 Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 143 Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 256 Trip, deleting 158 Trip, storing 158 Trip computer, refer to
Displays on the Control Display 84 Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 82 Triple turn signal activation 71 Trip odometer 82 Trips, changing 158 Trunk lid 35 Comfort Access 39 emergency release 36 locking or unlocking separately 36 opening from inside 35 opening from outside 36 remote control 33 Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 285 Turn signal 71 Turn signal indicators indicator/warning lamp 12 Turn signals triple turn signal 71 Tying down loads, refer to Cargo loading 143
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 255
Units average fuel
consumption 87 Units of measure temperature 87

311

Reference Everything from A to Z

ProCarManuals.com

Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 122
Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 38
Unlocking from inside 35 from outside 32 setting unlocking
characteristics 32 trunk lid 39 without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 38 Updating the navigation
data 148 Using contact data 224
V
Variable light distribution, refer to Adaptive Light Control 112
Vehicle battery 274 breaking in 138 cargo loading 141 identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 259 measurements, refer to
Dimensions 285 parking 63 weight 287 Vehicle equipment 5 Vehicle jack 274 Vehicle storage 269 Ventilation 119 draft-free 120 in the rear 120 Ventilation, refer to
Climate 116 Ventilation while at a
standstill 120 Vents, refer to Ventilation 119 Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice instructions 161

Voice commands overview 25 short commands 290 telephone 214 Voice instructions from
navigation system 161 repeating 161 switching on/off 161 volume 161 Voice phone book 215 Volume fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 289 mobile phone 209 voice instructions 161
W
Warning and indicator lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to Check Control 92
Warning triangle 277 Washer fluid 72 content of the reservoir 73 Washer fluid reservoir 72 Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 128 Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 140 Water penetration 266, 267 Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 256 Weights 287 Welcome lamps 111 Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and tires 257 Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 285 Wheels, new 257 Wheels and tires 239 Width, refer to Dimensions 285 Wind deflector 45

Windows 40 convenient opening and
closing 32 convenient opening and
closing with Comfort Access 39 opening, closing 40 pinch protection system 41 Windows, indicator on Control Display 18 Windshield cleaning 72 Windshield wash 71 filling capacity, reservoir 289 nozzles 72 reservoir for washer fluid 72 washer fluid 72 Windshield wiper blades, changing 270 Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 71 Winter tires 258 setting speed limit 93 storage 258 Wiper blade replacement 270 Wiper system 71 Work in the engine compartment 260 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 270
X
xDrive 99 Xenon lamps replacing bulb 271
Y
Your individual vehicle settings, refer to Personal
Profile 30

312

More about BMW

bmwusa.com

The Ultimate Driving Machine

ProCarManuals.com 01 40 2 609 333 ue iDrive

FrameMaker 7.2 Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)